AB-CD1700 Service Manual (1995-02 Rev 9140265A) Pp446-OCR

• Section Table of Contents
•
•
1 General Information
2 Theory of Operation
CELL-DYN ® 1700 SYSTEM
• 3 System Description
• 4 Circuit Description SERVICE MANUAL
• 5 Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting
• 6 Diagrams and Schematics Part Number 9211417
• 7 Removal and Replacement
• 8 Alignment and Verification
Procedures
• Appendix A Planned
Maintenance
• Appendix B Closed Sample
Option
• Appendix C CELL-DYN 1700
System Interface
Specification
Abbott Laboratories ©1995, Abbott Diagnostics

Abbott Park, IL 60064 Abbott Diagnostics is a wholly owned
9140265A - February 1995 subsidiary of Abbott Laboratories
INTRODUCTION
Table of Contents
• Proprietary Information
• Revision Status
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1995 1

INTRODUCTION
Proprietary Information
Abbott Laboratories software programs are protected by copyright. All rights reserved.
No part off this document may be reproduced, stored, retrieved, or transmitted in any form or by any
means without the prior written permission of Abbott Laboratories.
This service manual was developed for use in the field by trained Abbott Laboratories Field Service
Representatives. The revision status of the manual is the responsibility of the manual holder.
In no event shall Abbott Laboratories or its subsidiaries be liable for any damages incurred in connec-
tion with or arising from the use of this manual by persons not fully trained by Abbott Laboratories.
The examples contained in this manual are intended for illustrative purposes only.
CELL-DYN® is a registered trademark of Sequoia-Turner Corporation, a wholly owned subsidiary of

Abbott Laboratories.
QAPlus© is a registered trademark of DiagSoft, Inc.
TYGON® is a registered trademark of Norton Performance Plastics.
VACUTAINER® is a registered trademark of Becton, Dickinson, and Company.
© 1995 by Abbott Laboratories. All rights reserved.

INTRODUCTION
Revision Status
The revision status of the CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual is indicated below. It is the responsibility
of the Field Service Representative to verify that the manual contains the latest revision number of all
pages. Additional copies of this manual may be purchased.
,
Revision number: Pages revised and/or added:
Originally issued February, 1995 Not applicable.
Table 1: Revision Record

Document Software Revision
Date
Control Version Incorporated
Incorporated
Number (If Applicable) by (Name)

INTRODUCTION
Document Software Revision Date
Control Version Incorporated Incorporated
Number (If Applicable) by (Name)
Record document control number and sign and date this log to
provide a permanent record of revisions.

Section 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Table of Contents
1.1 SECTION OVERVIEW
1.2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
1.3 SERVICE EXPERIENCE
1.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1.5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Service Manual Organization
Accident Prevention Labels
Biohazard Safety Precautions
Biohazard Safety
Sharps
Biohazard Disposal
Biohazard Spills
Manual Revision Information
1.6 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Physical Specifications
Operational Specifications
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-1

Section 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Aspiration Volumes - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS
Collection Tube and Sample Volume
Measurement Specifications - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS
Performance Specifications
Background Counts
Linearity
Carryover
Within Sample Precision
Accuracy
Bias
Performance Characteristics
Typical Precision
List of Tables
Table 1-1 Physical Specifications (Dimensions) - CELL-DYN 1700
Table 1-2 Dimensions After Packaging for Shipment - CELL-DYN 1700
Table 1-3 Physical Specifications - CELL-DYN 1700CS
Table 1-4 Dimensions After Packaging for Shipment - CELL-DYN 1700CS
Table 1-5 Power Specifications - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS
Table 1-6 Printer Input Requirements
Table 1-7 Power Consumption - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS
Table 1-8 Operating Environment - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS

Table 1-9 Complete Cycle Times - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS-
Table 1-10 Aspiration Volumes
Table 1-11 WBC and Differential
Table 1-12 RBCs and PLTs
Table 1-13 HGB
Table 1-14 Background Counts
Table 1-15 Linearity Specifications
Table 1-16 Carryover - Open, Pre-Dilute, and Closed Modes
Table 1-17 Within Sample Precision of the Hemogram Parameters - Open Mode
Table 1-18 Within Sample Precision of the Hemogram Parameters - Closed Mode
Table 1-19 Precision of WBC Differential Parameters - Open and Closed Modes
Table 1-20 Whole Blood Accuracy Results - Open and Closed Modes
Table 1-21 Typical Within Sample Precision Results - Open Mode
Table 1-22 Typical Within Sample Precision Results - Closed Mode

This section provides a list of the major components and sub-assemblies of the CELL-DYN 1700, a
brief description of the remaining sections in this manual, a discussion of how to use this manual, and
an overview of the instrument's physical, operational, and measurement specifications.
1.2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE
This manual contains service information for the CELL-DYN 1700 Automated Hematology Analyzer.
Included in this manual are the theory of operation, system and circuit descriptions, alignment and
verification procedures, diagrams and schematics, and board-level replacement procedures for all
major system components.
The CELL-DYN 1700 Automated Hematology Analyzer is a complex system. Analyzer performance
depends on several external components that together make up the complete hematology system.
Each system comprises the following components and subsystems:
• OPERATOR/OPERATOR TECHNIQUE (MAINTENANCE)
• REAGENT SYSTEM
- DILUENT
- DETERGENT
- LYSE
• PATIENT AND CONTROL SAMPLES
• ENVIRONMENT/POWER LINE INTEGRITY
• CELL-DYN 1700 ANALYZER
- SYRINGE ASSEMBLY
- FLUID POWER SUPPLY
- CLOSED SAMPLE ASSEMBLY

- FLOW PANEL SYSTEM
- MEASUREMENT ELECTRONICS
- USER INTERFACE COMPUTER
1.3 SERVICE EXPERIENCE
Based on experience and service history, the incidence of hematology problems and their causes
tend to occur in the same descending order of components and subsystems listed above. Note that
the majority of problems and their causes will originate with components external to the analyzer. It
follows that all external components and conditions, such as reagents, environment, integrity of sam-
ples and controls, etc., be checked and verified as correct before performing service on the analyzer.
In the investigation of any complaint, the instrument should be the last component of the system to be
suspected.
1.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
It is essential that the Field Service Representative read and understand the CELL-DYN 1700 Opera-
tions Manual, and be able to correctly perform all routine operating functions before attempting to
troubleshoot and repair the system.

1.5 HOW TO US
Service Manual rganization

This service man al is organized into the following sections to facilitate its use in the operation, trou-
bleshooting, rep ir, and alignment and verification of the CELL-DYN 1700:
Section 1 General Information
Section 2 Theory of Operation
Section 3 System Description
Section 4 Circuit Descriptions
Section 5 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
Section 6 Diagrams and Schematics
Section 7 Removal and Replacement
Section 8 Alignment and Verification Procedures
Section 9 Appendices
The Generallnfor ation section gives an overview of the service manual, discusses how to use the
manual, and provi es the physical and operational specifications of the CELL-DYN 1700 system.
The Theory of Op ration section describes the electrical impedance principle and its application to an
electronic particle counter in the measurement of RBC, WBC and PLTs. This section also describes
the sample flow s quence in the Open, Pre-Dilute, and Closed modes and discusses the methods
used to accuratel size the cells and generate histograms for the measurement of MCV, MPV, ROW,
and POW.
The System Desc iption section provides a system overview as well as a brief description of the major
subsystems.

The Circuit Descri tions section describes the individual circuits in the analyzer and provides simpli-
fied schematics of these circuits to aid in the understanding of their function.
The Diagnostics a d Troubleshooting section provides a guide for the classification of potential ana-
lyzer fault conditio s and to aid in their isolation and correction. This section also includes a list of
system status err r codes and their explanations and a list of service commands to initiate operations
of individual devic s and/or systems.
The Diagrams an Schematics section includes the assembly diagrams and flow system schematics
necessary to trou leshoot and repair the CELL-DYN 1700.
The Removal and Replacement section includes detailed system disassembly and board-level
replacement infor ation.
The Alignment an Verification Procedures section provides step by step instructions for correct elec-
tronic alignment a d verification of the CELL-DYN 1700 analyzer to ensure optimum performance of
the analyzer. The e procedures also function as a diagnostic tool to isolate a defective module or
Printed Circuit Bo rd.
Appendices provi e additional documentation regarding planned maintenance, RS-232 Interface
Specifications, an the Closed Sample flow sequence.
Accident Preven ion Labels

Danger, Warning, aution, and Note labels are provided as needed in this service manual to warn,
inform, and assist he Field Service Representative. Each label, and the information associated with
it, is enclosed in a border for easy visual identification. The labels denote information as follows:

DANGER
Denotes possible death or serious injury; failure to comply will

xpose the operator or Field Service Representative to significant
risk of serious injury or death.
WARNING
Denotes clear and present danger or questionable result efficacy;

ailure to comply may result in incorrect instrument performance
leading to instrument failure, generation of erroneous results, or
hazard to the operator or Field Service Representative.
CAUTION
Denotes minor, non-immediate, or potential hazard; failure to

omply may result in unexpected instrument performance or may
xpose the operator or Field Service Representative to potentially
hazardous conditions.
NOTE: Denote general information and helpful hints; failure to comply will present no safety, effi-
cacy, 0 performance issues.

The following war ing icons are displayed where appropriate in this manual.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. The biohazard icon

alerts users to an activity or area where they may be
exposed to infectious materials or substances.
WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. The electrical

warning icon alerts users to the possibility of electrical
shock in the described activity or at the posted location.
Static. Failure to comply may cause damage to the

Printed Circuit Board. Observe precautions for handling
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD).
CAUTION. The general caution icon appears adjacent

to an explanation of conditions that could interfere with
the proper functioning of the instrument.

Biohazard Safet
When working on the CELL-DYN 1700, service personnel should keep the following hazards in mind.
Biohazard Safety
Consider all clinic I specimens, reagents, controls and calibrators, etc. that contain human blood or
serum as potentia Iy infectious. Wear gloves, lab coats, and safety glasses, and follow other biosafety
practices.
Shar~
The Sample Prob ,electrodes, and Cap Piercing Needle (CELL-DYN 1700CS) are sharp and may be
contaminated wit potentially infectious materials. Avoid contacting them before they have been
decontaminated.
All clinical specim ns, reagents, controls, calibrators, cuvettes, and other disposables that may be
contaminated mu t be disposed according to local, state, and federal regulations governing the treat-
ment of regulated medical waste. The probe must be placed in an appropriately marked puncture-
resistant containe prior to disposal.
Biohazard S~
Clean spills of pot ntially infectious materials in accordance with established biosafety practices.
Absorb spill with absorbent material, wipe area with detergent solution, then wipe area with disinfec-
tant (100/0 solution of a 5% bleach).

Manual Revision Information
Revision pages keep the CELL-DYN 1700 Service Manual up to date with configuration changes and
servicing techniques. A new title page with the revision log will be sent with each change package.
This list will contain the page number of each changed or added page along with the revision dash (-)
number of that page. Pages not listed are original pages.
If either the information or the spare part is unique to United States Field Service only, then US is
noted beside the item. If the item is unique to International Field Service only, then INTL is noted
beside the item.
The two following symbols are used to show areas or sections in this service manual which have been
affected by a TSB or an ISA. For example:
I T 25 I I~I
TSB 60-025 TSB 60-025 Not
Installed Installed
The following symbol is used to identify the ISA containing additional information about the part or
area.
I 25
"NOTES" Page

The reverse side of each section's table of contents is reserved for the Field Service Representative
to insert helpful hints, comments regarding errors, or suggestions for improvement.
1.6 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Physical Specifications
Physical specifications for the CELL-DYN 1700 and CELL-DYN 1700CS are listed in Tables 1-1
through 1-7.
Analyzer Printer
Height 19" (49 cm) 5" (13 cm)
Width 34" (87 cm) 16 " (41 cm)
Depth 24" (61 cm) 14" (36 cm)
Weight 145 Ib (66 kg) 16 Ib (7 kg)
Table 1-1: Physical Specifications (Dimensions) - CELL-DYN 1700
Analyzer Printer
Height 30" (76 cm) 9" (23 cm)
Width 42" (107 cm) 22" (56 cm)
Depth 32" (81 em) 20" (51 cm)
Weight 200 Ib (91 kg) 35 Ib (16 kg)
Table 1-2: Dimensions After Packaging for Shipment - CELL-DYN 1700
Analyzer
Height 19" (49 em)
Width 34" (87 em)
Depth 26" (66 em)
Weight 155 Ib (71 kg)
Table 1-3: Physical Specifications (Dimensions) - CELL-DYN 1700CS
Analyzer
Height 30" (76 em)
Width 42" (107 em)
Depth 32" (81 em)
Weight 210 Ib (96 kg)
Table 1-4: Dimensions After Packaging for Shipment -CELL-DYN 1700CS
Setting Range Frequency

100 90-110 VAC 50/60 Hz
120 110-130 VAC 50/60 Hz
220 200-240VAC 50/60 Hz
240 220-260VAC 50/60 Hz
Table 1-5: Power Spec. (Analyzer Input Requirements) - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS

Setting Frequency
120 50/60 Hz
Table 1-6: Printer Input Requirements
Avg. 410 Watts (1460 BTU per hour)

Analyzer
Max. 600 Watts (2130 BTU per hour)
Printer 120 Watts
Connector Three-prong grounded outlet (U.S.)
Table 1-7: Power Consumption - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS
Operational Specifications
Operational specifications for the CELL-DYN 1700 and CELL-DYN 1700CS are listed in Tables 1-8
and 1-9.

Patient Samples - Room Temperature 23°C
Temperature
(73°F)
Monocyte values exhibit a change at lower and
higher temperatures. A 1.5°;6 decrease is
seen in the total monocyte percent at lower
temperatures <18°C (64OF). A 6% increase will
be seen at higher temperatures.
Instrument 15°C to 30°C (59°F ( 86°F)
Relative
100/0 to 850/0, noncondensing
Humidity
Flat, level surface, no direct sunlight or drafts.
Remove from sources of direct heat or mois-
ture.
Location
Ventilation space at least 6" on top, sides, and
back. Do not place next to a heat generating
device. Do not block fans.
Table 1-8: Operating Environment - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS

Auto-Startup (from STANDBY) Approximately 250 seconds
Auto-Startup (from power OFF) Approximately 300 seconds
Run, Open mode 60 seconds (READY to READY)
90 seconds (READY to
Run, Closed mode
READY)
Run, Pre-Dilute mode 60 seconds (READY to READY)
Auto-Shutdown (to STANDBY) Between 220 and 300 seconds
Table 1-9: Complete Cycle Times - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS
Aspiration Volumes - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS

Approximate aspiration volumes (whole blood) are shown in Table 1-10.
Aspiration
Open mode 30
Pre-Dilute mode 40
Closed mode 450
Table 1-10: Aspiration Volumes

Collection Tube and Sample Volume
13 mm diameter x 75 mm high with a Hemoguard closure (maximum height is 100 mm for Closed
mode)
• Minimum sample volume = 1 mL
Measurement Specifications - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS

• Impedance channel for both RBC and PLT
• Hemoglobin Absorbance
Measurement specifications are listed in Tables 1-11 through 1-14.
Method Aperture Impedance

Dilution 1:285 of blood in diluent and lyse
100 pM (diameter) x 60 pM
Aperture Size
(length)
Data collected in 256 channels
Data Collection
Each WBC channel = 1.758 fI...
Table 1-11: WBC and Differential

Method Aperture Impedance
Dilution 1:12,801 of blood in diluent
Aperture Size 60 flM (diameter) x 70 flM (length)
256 channels for RBCs, each RBC channel
Data Collec- = 1 fL
tion 256 channels for PLTs, each PLT channel
=0.137 fL
Table 1-12: RBCs and PLTs
Method Modified cyanmethemoglobin

Light Source LED
Wavelength 540 nm
1:285 of blood in diluent and
Dilution
lyse
Table 1-13: HGB

Performance Specifications
Background Counts
The background values must meet the specifications given in Table 1-14.
WBC <0.5 K/JlL

RBC <0.05 M/JlL
HGB <0.1 g/dL
PLT <10.0 K/JlL
Table 1-14: Background Counts
Linearity
Linearity specifications are determined by analyzing dilutions of a sample or commercially available
control material that contains no interfering substances and displays no suspect parameter flags.
Specifications are determined by taking multiple measurements on each dilution to minimize the effect
of imprecision.

The stated limits are determined by linear regression through the origin (0,0), assuring that the col-
lected data throughout the linear reportable range does not exceed the stated Allowable Limits in
Table 1-15.
Parameter Linear Reportable Allowable

Range Limits
(+/- or %)*
WBC 1.0 - 99.9 KlJlL +/- 0.4 or 3.0%
RBC 1.00 -7.00 M/JlL +/- 0.1 or 2.5%
HGB 2.5 - 24 g/dL +/- 0.3 or 2.0%
MCV 50 - 200 fL +/- 3.0 or 3.0%
PLT 10 - 999 KlJlL +/- 12.0 or 4.0%
MPV 5-20.0fL +/- 1.0 or 3.0%
Table 1-15: Linearity Specifications
* Whichever is greater. Applies to actual mean value obtained in reference to the expected
value

Carryover
Carryover is determined by running samples with high concentrations of WBCs, RBCs, HGB, and
PLTs. Each sample is run in triplicate followed by three background cycles. The percent carryover is
calculated using the following formula:
Carryover = (Background1 - Background3). x 100
(Sample3 - Background3)
Table 1-16 shows the carryover percent for WBC, RBC, HGB, and PLT in the Open, Pre-Dilute, and
Closed modes.
WBC RBC HGB PLT

(K1Il L) (M/IlL) (g/dL) (K1Il L)
Level 90.0 6.20 22.0 900
% Carryover < 1.0 < 0.5 < 0.8 < 1.0
Table 1-16: Carryover - Open, Pre-Dilute, and Closed Modes
Within Sample Precision
Samples that are used to verify precision specifications should have results that fall within the labora-
tory's reference interval (normal range). These samples should not display any suspect parameter
flags.
Precision is a check on routine instrument operation. Tables 1-17 and 1-18 present the precision
specifications for the hemogram parameters for specimens run in the Open and Closed modes
respectively. The stated CV% in this table represents the instrument precision at a 95% confidence
level from N=20 replicate runs.
Precision specifications in the Pre-Dilute mode may have an increasedlevel of imprecision due to
operator technique.
Parameter CV%
WBC < 2.5
RBC < 1.7
HGB < 1.2
MCV < 1.5
PLT < 6.0
MPV < 6.0
Table 1-17: Within Sample Precision of the Hemogram Parameters - Open Mode
Parameter CV%
WBC < 2.7
RBC < 1.7
HGB < 1.2
MCV < 1.5
PLT < 6.0
MPV < 6.0
Table 1-18: Within Sample Precision of the Hemogram Parameters - Closed Mode

Precision specifications for the WBC Differential parameters are given in Table 1-19 as a 95% confi-
dence limit for a range of values for each of the WBC subpopulations.
Cell Type Range 950/0 Confidence

Level
Lymphocyte% 18-57% +/- 3.1%
Mid 4-9% +/- 1.6
Granulocyte 36-77% +/- 3.5
Table 1-19: Precision of WBC Differential Parameters - Open and Closed Modes
Accuracy
Evaluation of the accuracy of the CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS in the Open mode is demonstrated in
Table 1-20. This data was computed from correlation analysis of data obtained from Method Compar-
ison studies performed on approximately 100 whole blood samples analyzed against a reference
method. None of the samples used for the correlation studies exhibited any suspect parameter or sus-
pect population flags.

Parameter Range Correlation Coefficient

WBC 0.5 - 96.5 > 0.98
lYM# 0.1-94.5 > 0.92
MID# 0.0 -11.4 > 0.60
GRAN# 0.1 -40.8 > 0.92
RBC 1.48 - 6.47 > 0.98
HGB 4.2 -18.2 > 0.98
HCT 12.5 - 55.3 > 0.98
MCV 63- 113 > 0.98
RDW 10.8 - 27.6 > 0.92
PlT 11-939 > 0.98
MPV 6.4 -15.4 > 0.92
Table 1-20: Whole Blood Accuracy Results - Open and Closed Modes
Bias
Bias in the case of the CElL-DYN 1700 is measured by the correlation coefficient, since the restricted
range of many hematology parameters precludes the use of the fitted linear regression equation to
ascertain the bias magnitude, such as is recommended in NCClS Document EP9-T. Also note that
this restricted range, along with the known imprecision of the standard comparative methods, places
an upper limit on the degree of correlation that can be expected for several of the parameters.\

Performance Characteristics
J¥pical Precision
Performance characteristics provide a concise summary of system performance when operated under
normal laboratory conditions. The pooled precision values (CV%) for the Within Sample Hemogram
parameters, shown in Tables 1-21 and 1-22 for Open and Closed mode respectively, are based on
the analysis of data from replicate runs of N=20
Typical Within Sample

Precision
Parameter Range CV%
WBC 4.4 - 9.0 2.1
RBC 3.78 - 5.60 1.2
HGB 12.2 - 15.9 1.0
MCV 78-97 1.0
PLT 179-420 3.2
MPV 7.4 -11.5 4.6
Table 1-21: Typical Within Sample Precision Results - Open Mode

Typical Within Sample
Precision
Parameter Range CV%
WBC 4.0 -11.4 2.2
RBC 3.92 - 5.47 1.4
HGB 11.7 -16.7 1.0
MCV 73-100 1.0
PLT 165-408 3.2
MPV 7.3 -12.4 4.2
Table 1-22: Typical Within Sample Precision Results - Closed Mode

Section 2
THEORY OF OPERATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.3 PURPOSE OF SYSTEM
2.4 SAMPLE PREPARATION
2.5 SAMPLE TRANSPORT
Open Sample Mode
Pre-Dilute Mode
Closed Sample Mode
Sample Dilution
2.6 PARTICLE DETECTION
2.7 PULSE AMPLITUDE TO PARTICLE SIZE RESPONSE
2.8 SIZE THRESHOLD AND CELL CHANNELIZATION
2.9 METERED VOLUME
2.10 RBC, WBC, AND PLT HISTOGRAM GENERATION

Section 2 THEORY OF OPERATION
2.11 HEMOGLOBIN
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1 CELL-DYN 1700 Basic Block Diagram
Figure 2-2 Electrical Impedance Detection
Figure 2-3 Pulse Amplitude to Particle Size Response
Figure 2-4 Meniscus Detection
Figure 2-5 Histogram Generation
Figure 2-6 Simplified Hemoglobin Block Diagram

This section provides a brief review of the principles of operation for the CELL-DYN 1700, including
sample preparation, sample aspiration, the flow system, and the measurement process.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The CELL-DYN 1700 is basically a particle counter dedicated to the electronic detection and mea-
surement of blood cells contained in a sample of whole blood. Blood cells are particles which exhibit
the special quality of being electrical insulators. In whole blood, these particles are suspended in a
conductive medium commonly called plasma. It is these two natural electrical qualities that permit the
electronic measurement of the following:
• The number of cells per unit of volume
• The size of each cell
• The size distribution of all cells contained in a sample.
A simplified diagram of a particle counter is shown in Figure 2-1. The major functions of an electronic
particle counter are as follows:
• Sample transport (Flow System)
• Particle detection (Transducer)
• Pulse amplitude to particle size response (Amplifier)
• Size thresholds (Discriminators) and cell channelization (AID converter)
• Sample volume metering (Metering System).

2.3 PURPOSE OF SYSTEM
The purpose of this system is to convert the size of each detected particle to an electronic equivalent
signal. This signal is then processed to calculate the number of particles within a pre-selected size
range for a known sample volume. The displayed value represents the concentration of the sample in
cells per microliter (cellsIJlL).
Hemoglobin is measured by a separate colorimetric method. The absorbance, calculated from the
measured values of light transmission, is directly proportional to the concentration of hemoglobin.
A description of each major function of the instrument necessary to accomplish this task follows.
2.4 SAMPLE PREPARATION
A major disadvantage of whole blood measurement relative to electronic particle counting is the high
concentration of cells in whole blood. This problem is easily solved by controlled dilution. A prerequi-
site for electronic particle detection is low sample concentrations that will permit the existence of only
one particle in the sensing zone at any given time. Two or more cells in the sensing zone will be
detected as a single cell and result in a counting error. The high concentration of cells in whole blood
requires accurate dilution before electronic measurement can be attempted. When the dilution ratio is
known, the value measured by the instrument can be related to the whole blood value.
An obvious question is how much dilution of whole blood is required to satisfy the requirement of sin-
gle cell detection in the sensing zone?

+VOLTS
CONSTANT M ANALOG SIGNAL
r--:-.....:...---------o I0 - - - - - - 1
AID
DATA
CURRENT I AID
GAIN
I CONY.
I ENABLE MAIN
I COMPUTER
I
_____ J
.., TRANSDUCER HARDWARE
AMP.
DISCRIMINATOR
Ro SAMPLE
+V
Ra APERTURE
r------------------------
I Metering System METERING TUBE
I
R1 DETERGENT I I
............ I OPTICAL I
I LED SWITCH I DISPLAY
I START I
I DISTANCE =VOLUME LOGIC I
OPTICAL DECODE STOP I
II ~ ~~ I
I I
I
I I
IL _ I
Figure 2-1 CELL·DYN 1700 Basic Block Diagram SS00006A

It is the internal volume of the sensing zone that determines the ratio of dilution required. By calcula-
tion, the ideal dilution ratios for the CELL-DYN 1700 are as follows:
RBC: 1: 12,801
WBC: 1:285
Whole Blood PLT: 1: 12,801
These dilutions will reduce the coincidence of two or more cells in the sensing zone simultaneously,
but not eliminate it. Fortunately, this coincidence loss can be statistically predicted, based on sample
concentration, and coincidence corrected before display.
2.5 SAMPLE TRANSPORT
Open Sample Mode

The following events occur during WBC and RBC/PLT open sample processing:
1. When the Touch Plate is pressed, 30 pie Syringe from an open VACUTAINER@, held by
the operator, into the Sample Aspiration Probe.
2. As the probe, holding the sample, is raised, its exterior surface is cleaned by the Wash
Block.
3. The probe is then positioned in the Pre-Mixing Cup and the sample is dispensed with 7.5
mL of diluent. Blood and diluent are bubble-mixed in the cup. This dilution is referred to
as the pre-mix sample.
4. 100 raised, its exterior is cleaned by the Wash Block.
5. The probe is then positioned in the Mixing Chamber of the von Behrens RBC/PLT

Transducer and the diluted sample is dispensed with 5 mL of diluent. The sample and
diluent are bubble-mixed in the chamber.
6. The remainder of the diluted sample from step 3 is transferred to the Mixing Chamber of
the von Behrens WBC Transducer. 1 mL of lyse is also deposited into the WBC
chamber. The sample and lyse are bubble-mixed.
7. In both the WBC and RBC Transducers, a vacuum draws the diluted sample from the
Mixing Chamber through the aperture plate into the Counting Chamber to obtain cell count
and histogram data.
8. WBC and RBC/PLT volume metering occurs simultaneously with WBC and RBC/PLT cell
counting.
9. Detergent in the HGB Flow Cell is measured to determine a reference.
10. Part of the sample from the WBC chamber is then sent to the HGB Flow Cell for HGB
measurement, pushing the detergent to the Waste System.
11. Samples remaining in the WBC and RBC/PLT Mixing Chambers, Metering Tubes, and
HGB Flow Cell are drained and sent to the Waste System.
12. The Pre-Mixing Cup, WBC/RBC chambers, and lines that carried the sample are washed
with diluent which is then flushed to the Waste System. The two Metering Tubes and
HGB Flow Cell are washed with detergent.

Pre-Dilute Mode
There are two sources of pre-diluted solution. A third party vendor may supply it or the operator can
make a pre-diluted solution as described in Section 5: Operating Instructions, Subsection: Run-
ning Samples-Pre-Dilute Mode or Section 6: Calibration, Subsection: Pre-Dilute Method of the
CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual.
Whether the pre-diluted sample is supplied by a third party or prepared by the operator, the following
events occur:
1. In the RUN screen, press [PRE-DILUTE].
2. Pour the pre-diluted solution into the Pre-Mixing Cup and press the Touch Plate.
3. The instrument automatically performs additional dilutions and test measurements as
described in steps 4 through 12 of the Open Sample Mode processing sequence.
Closed Sample Mode

The following events occur during closed sample processing. For a more complete description of the
Closed Sample flow system, refer to the Closed Sample Option in Appendix B.
1. When an inverted, capped VACUTAINER® is placed in the VACUTAINER® holder of the
Closed Sample Assembly and the Closed Sample Touch Plate is pressed, a needle
pierces the VACUTAINER® cap.
2. 330 to wash out particles of previous diluent remaining in the needle, flow line, and
Sample Transfer Cup. The 330 t.
3. An additional 120 ing, displacing 120 Sample Transfer Cup.

4. The 120 maining sample in the tubing (approximately 190 Ie Transfer Cup.
5. 30 ion Probe by the Sample Syringe.
6. Steps 2 through 12 of the Open Sample Mode flow sequence are repeated.
7. The remainder of blood sample in the tubing is pumped to the Sample Transfer Cup then
to the Waste System.
8. Diluent is pumped into the Sample Transfer Cup to soak the cup, then flushed to the
waste system. Diluent is again pumped to the cup and backflushed through the flow line
to the needle and waste well to wash out these components, then pumped to the Waste
System.
Sample Dilution
A 30 ,ttL sample of whole blood is drawn into the Sample Probe and mixed with 7.5 mL of diluent to
make the primary dilution. A second 100,ttL is then aspirated from the primary dilution to make the
secondary 1: 12,801 RBC/PLT dilution. The primary dilution is then mixed with 1 mL of lyse to com-
plete the 1:285 WBC/HGB dilution. The vacuum system transports the primary and secondary dilu-
tions through the WBC and RBC apertures and HGB Flow Cell.
The flow system is then flushed and made ready for the next sample.
2.6 PARTICLE DETECTION
A transducer employing the electrical impedance principle is used for detection. This function per-
forms the conversion of the physical properties of a detected cell to an electronic equivalent signal.

Figure 2-2 depicts this principle. An aperture of defined diameter and length separates the flow of a
constant current between an inner and outer electrode. Conduction is provided by an electrolyte. In
this case, the electrolyte is buffered saline.
The electrical current is supplied by a constant current source and it continues at a constant rate in the
absence of a particle (cell) within the confines of the aperture. Therefore, there are no interruptions to
this current flow and no signal appears at the output of the amplifier.
Consider the passage of a blood cell, an insulator, through the aperture. The passage of the cell
caused by the differential pressure between the isolated tanks will cause a momentary increase in
impedance, which is directly related to the volumetric size of the cell. Constant current is maintained
by a proportional increase in voltage. The charge and discharge of the coupling capacitor induces a
signal into the inverting input of the amplifier. The output of the amplifier produces an instantaneous,
amplified electrical pulse. The amplitude represents the volumetric size of the detected cell.
2.7 PULSE AMPLITUDE TO PARTICLE SIZE RESPONSE
The continuous passage of cells through the aperture's sensing zone produces a pulse train at the
output of the amplifier. The gain control of the amplifier calibrates the sizing function of the instrument
by establishing a known relationship between the mean size of the cells and the mean pulse ampli-
tude of the signal. This linear response is depicted in Figure 2-3.
2.8 SIZE THRESHOLD AND CELL CHANNELIZATION
Figure 2-1, shown earlier, is a basic block diagram of the measurement and metering circuitry for
RBC, WBC, and PLT.

+ VOLTS
AMBIENT CONSTANT CURRENT

PRESSURE VACUUM
! t GAIN
. . ...
. .
.- . . .....
• APERTURE
SIGNAL OUT
. .
•
.. .. ... AMPLIFIER
SAMPLE· DETERGENT
TRANSDUCER
SS00007A

SIZE RESPONSE EQUALS 20 MV PER CUBIC MICRON
1.00 V
.800 V
PULSE
PEAK .600 V
VOLTS
.400 v
.200 V
10 UM 3 20 UM 3 30UM 3 40UM 3 50UM 3
CELL VOLUME IN CUBIC MICRONS

SS00008A
Figure 2-3 Pulse Amplitude to Parlicle Size Response

The output of the amplifier is routed to the input of the coarse discriminator and switched input of an AI
D converter. If the amplitude of an individual cell pulse (analog signal) is within a pre-selected range,
the coarse discriminator will close the switch and place the cell pulse on the AID converter input. The
AID converter then converts the cell pulse to a 9-bit digital word that is directly proportional to the peak
amplitude. This 9-bit word (cell AID data) is sent to the main computer, where it increments an indi-
vidual size channel (memory location).
There are 256 size channels for each parameter RBC, WBC, and PLT.
Upon completion of the sample cycle, this data is used to generate counts, histograms, and percent-
age results for final display.
2.9 METERED VOLUME
The measurements require a known, repeatable sample volume. The instrument performs this func-
tion by optical detection of the leading edge of a liquid column (meniscus), as depicted in Figure 2-4.
The light transfer efficiency between an IR (infrared) light source and a photo transistor is controlled
by the optical characteristics of a glass metering tube in the light path. In the absence of liquid, as
shown in State A, the metering tube contains air and reduces the transfer of light by the refraction of
the glass walls and the density of the air within the glass tube.
With reference to State C, the metering tube is filled with liquid. The level of refraction is reduced by
an increase in optical density of the liquid, and a small increase in light transfers the results.
A third state will momentarily occur during the transition of the meniscus through the light path. As
shown in State B, the light transfer efficiency is greatly reduced when the light path is deviated by
refraction as well as reflection qualities of the concave meniscus. It is this phenomenon that serves
as a leading edge detector.

When two detectors are placed along a fixed length of a precision bore metering tube, the volume of
sample can be measured by sensing a start count at the first detector and a stop count at the second
detector.
2.10 RBC, WBC, AND PLT HISTOGRAM GENERATION
As stated earlier, each parameter has 256 channels available. The width of each channel is as fol-
lows:
RBC - 1.00 cubic microns
WBC - 1.758 cubic microns
PLT - 0.137 cubic microns
The RBC will be used as an example since it has a 1:1 relationship.
Figure 2-5 illustrates a smoothed RBC histogram and an enlarged view of the raw counts per channel
of the peak portion of the histogram (section "A").
If we compare section "B" with section "A", we can see the relationship of channel data to the actual
histogram shape. The raw counts increase, with volume, on the leading edge and decrease on the
trailing edge.

STATE STATE STATE

A B C
~
1 1
.-
~
"'"
.
",
./
,.-.
;'
START START ~ START

• -- ,....
~
"_~ ... --
1 \
\
.-
~
VOLUME ~ "'"
_t STOP
• -- I- •
STOP
~ . -- I-.
STOP
-- ~.
C (WET)
LIGHT A (DRY)
TRANSFER
THRESHOLD
----------- - 1-------------
~ LIGHT REFLECTED
TIME •
Figure 2-4 Meniscus Detection SSOOOO9A

"A" "B"
SMOOTHED RBC HISTOGRAM SECTION "A" RAW COUNTS PER CHANNEL
>-
u MCV=92 >-
u
:z :z
w w
:::J SECTION A :::J
0 0
w w
0::: 0:::
LL LL
W W
> >
~
....I
~
....I
W w
0::: 0:::
50 100 150
VOLUME (CUBIC MICRONS) CHANNEL# ONE CUBIC MICRON PER CHANNEL
Figure 2-5 Histogram Generation SS00010A

The MCV is derived by calculating the weighted average of the number of red blood cells in a speci-
fied channel range as follows: (1) the number of red blood cells per channel is multiplied by the chan-
nel number then the results of each multiplication are summed, and (2) the sum calculated above is
then divided by the sum of the red blood cells in the specified channel range.
From the data accumulated in all channels we can also derive RBC count and Hematocrit.
WBC and PLT histograms are generated in the same manner and are used in various equations to
derive other calculated parameters.
A description of all parameters is contained in the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual.
2.11 HEMOGLOBIN
A simplified hemoglobin system is shown schematically in Figure 2-6. The concentration of hemoglo-
bin in the prepared sample is measured in grams per deciliter. This concentration is proportional to
the absorbance of the light in the green, 540 nanometer wavelength region.
A clear reference solution (detergent) is first measured in the HGB Flow Cell. A prepared sample con-
taining hemoglobin is measured next. Hemoglobin concentration is determined by subtracting the
logarithm of the voltage of the measured sample from the logarithm of the voltage of the clear refer-
ence solution.
A light path through the transparent flow cell is formed from the light source, a 540 nanometer interfer-
ence filter, and a photo detector.
The output current from the photo detector, which is proportional to the light energy received, is ampli-
fied by the current-to-voltage amplifier and provides an output signal.

MEASURE
/REFERENCE
5V
FLOW CELL VOLTS
4V
REF 100%
I
wi
OUT LOGARITHMIC
DEI DIFFERENCE
LIGHT SAMPLE IN VOLTS =HGB
• 3V
SOURCE
AMPLIFIER 2V \.--~I-----J t
FILTER
540NM 1V '--MEASURE
SAMPLE
OV
TIME
Figure 2-6 Simplified Hemoglobin Block Diagram SS00011A

Section 3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Table of Contents
3.2 SYSTEM SUB-ASSEMBLIES
Flow Panel
Fluid Power Supply
Reagent Inlet Panel
Syringe Assembly
Electronics Card Cage Assembly
CRT and Keyboard
Power Supply Module
3.3 MAJOR SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
Data Interface and Control Subsystem
Measurement Subsystem
Solenoid and Motor Subsystem
User Interface Computer Subsystem
Data Link Adapter (DLA)
IDE Controller and I/O Board
Input/Output Board

Super VGA Board
Computer Monitor
AC and DC Power Distribution Subsystem
List of Tables
Table 3-1 PC Motherboard Configuration
List of Figures
Figure 3-1 Data Interface and Control Board Diagram
Figure 3-2 Measurement Block Diagram
Figure 3-3 Solenoid and Motor Drive Block Diagram
Figure 3-4 User Interface Computer
Figure 3-5 Power Distribution Block Diagram

This section contains a system overview, as well as information on the major subsystems. For a more
detailed description of the CELL-DYN 1700 parameters, reagents, specifications, and operation, refer
to the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual.
3.2 SYSTEM SUB-ASSEMBLIES
The CELL-DYN 1700 is divided into the following major sub-assemblies:

• Flow Panel
• Fluid Power Supply
• Reagent Inlet Panel
• Syringe Assembly
• Electronics Card Cage
• CRT and Keyboard
• Power Supply Module
Flow Panel
The Flow Panel consists of the majority of tubing and hardware for sample processing.
Fluid Power Supply

The Fluid Power Supply contains the vacuum and pressure pumps, waste bottles, and associated
solenoids and hardware.

Reagent Inlet Panel
The Reagent Inlet Panel provides connections for incoming reagents and outgoing waste. Solenoids
for lyse, detergent, and diluent are also mounted on this panel.
Syringe Assembly
The Syringe Assembly includes the Sample Syringe for aspirating samples, the Diluent Syringe for
supplying diluent throughout the flow system, and the Lyse Syringe for dispensing lyse during the
HGB measurement process.
Electronics Card Cage Assembly

The electronics assembly provides command and control signals for the various electronic compo-
nents of the instrument. This assembly contains the Cell Count Module, Signal Processor Module,
Main Amplifier Module, and the Device Control Module.
CRT and Keyboard

The CRT provides visual data display and the keyboard provides data input by the operator.
Power Supply Module

The Linear (main) Power Supply Module provides power directly to the Cable Distribution Module, the
Pre-Amplifier Module, and analog circuit boards. The PC Power Supply provides power to the Power
Distribution Module which in turn provides power to the PC Motherboard and digital logic boards. The
24V (regulated) Switcher provides power for the stepper motors via the Power Distribution Module
and Motor Processor Module.

3.3 MAJOR SUBSYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
To aid in understanding the overall system, the electronic modules are divided into the following major
functional subsystems:
• Data Interface and Control Subsystem
• Measurement Subsystem
• Solenoid and Motor Drive Subsystem
• User Interface Computer Subsystem
• AC and DC Power Distribution Subsystem
Data Interface and Control Subsystem

The purpose of this subsystem is to interface the user data, control data, and system status data in
the system. This data is connected via four independent data busses:
• UIC/CCM (User Interface Computer/Cell Count Module)
• CCM/DCM (Cell Count Module/Device Control Module)
• DCM/CDM (Device Control Module/Cable Distribution Module)
• DCM/MPM (Device Control Module/Motor Processor Module)
Refer to Figure 3-1 for a diagram showing the data connections.
.When power to the instrument is turned ON, the system operating software is loaded from the hard
disk into RAM on the UIC (User Interface Computer). The UIC then uses various handshaking signals
and data bytes to communicate with the CCM (Cell Count Module).

The CCM functions as the master controller with all system functional commands residing in firmware
(PROM). The CCM sends control data and receives status data from the DCM (Device Control Mod-
ule).
The DCM provides current control to the von Behrens RBC and WBC Transducers and the two meter-
ing boards and serves as the system analog voltmeter for use in converting the HGB signal. Data is
written and read via the DCM/CDM and DCM/MPM data busses.
The COM (Cable Distribution Module) acts as controller for the solenoids and also interfaces data
from various system sensors.
The MPM (Motor Processor Module) acts as controller for all Stepper Motor Drive printed circuit
boards.
Measurement Subsystem
The measurement subsystem provides detection, amplification, and processing of the signals from
the von Behrens RBC/PLT Transducer, von Behrens WBC Transducer, and HGB Flow Cell. RBC/
PLT and WBC metering is also included in this subsystem.
Refer to Figure 3-2 for a diagram of the measurement process.

SERIAL
USER INTERFACE UIC/CCM CCM/DCM DCM/MPM
SOFTWARE I DATA DATA BUS
DATA BUS DATA BUS
-----------l LINK
ADAPTER
USER INTERFACE COMPUTER I
I
DISPLAY MONITOR
I4---PROBE RIGHT Sw.
PC KEYBOARD ~-PROBE LEFT sw.
~-PROBE UP Sw.
I4---PROBE DOWN Sw.
CDM !+--WBC METERING MOD.
~-RBC METERING MOD.
I4---START SWITCH (OPEN MODE)
~-START SWITCH (CLOSED MODE)
~-REAGENT EMPTY SENSORS
I4---EXT. WASTE EMPTY SEN.
~-INT. WASTE EMPTY SEN.
L--_-J
I4---PRESSURE OVERLIMIT Sw.
Figure 3-1 Data Interface and Control Block Diagram SS00012A

RBC UPPER DEl ...

METERING LOWER DEl IDISPLAY: UIC
MODULE ...
DCM/CDM
COM DATA BUS
----
DATA
UPPER DEl LINK
WBC ...... ADAPTER
METERING LOWER DEl
MODULE ... OCM
CCM/UIC
DATA BUS
LED DRIVE CCM/DCM DATA BUS

.... HGB SIGNAL ...
HGB
FLOW CELL HGBSIG. ...
RBCSIG. CELL AID DATA ... CCM

...
von Behrens "'..."
CONSli
EOC
RBC/PLT CELLSIG. RBC/PLT SIG.... WBCSIG. ...
TRANSDUCER ... ...
RBC/PLT ...
PAM MAM PLTSIG. ...... SPM
CONSl i
... CELL CLOCK
von Behrens WBCSIGNAL...
WBC/PLT CELLSIG. CELL STROBE ACK
TRANSDUCER ... ... ....
Figure 3-2 Measurement Block Diagram SS00013A

The PAM (Pre-Amplifier Module) supplies constant current for the von Behrens RBC/PLT and WBC
Transducers and HGB LED voltage.
The RBC/PLT and WBC cell pulses are input to the PAM where they are amplified and routed to the
MAM (Main Amplifier Module).
When the MAM receives signals from the RBC/PLT and WBC, the following occurs:
• The RBC/PLT signal is amplified and split into independent RBC and PLT signals.
• The WBC signal is amplified and sent to the SPM (Signal Processor Module).
• The PLT signal is sent to the SPM.
• The RBC signal is routed to the input of the SPM and the cell editing circuitry.
• Cell editing is performed on the RBC signal to eliminate invalid RBC pulses.
A detailed description of cell editing is contained in Section 4, Circuit Descriptions.
The RBC/PLT and WBC signals are accepted by the SPM. The SPM discriminates cell size by con-
verting pulse height to a proportional digital value. The amplitude of each valid pulse is measured by
a fast NO then sent across the data bus to the CCM.
The NO data for RBC, PLT, and WBC are individually divided by the CCM into 256 discrete size
channels. The cell count in each channel is accumulated in discrete memory locations and is used to
generate count data, percentage data, and histogram data for RBC, PLT, WBC, and other parame-
ters.
Signals from the upper and lower detectors on the RBC/PLT and WBC metering modules are con-
verted to TTL levels by comparators on the COM. The signals are then routed through the DCM to the
CCM where they are used to control RBC/PLT and WBC sample timing.

The HGB analog signal from the HGB Flow Cell is input to the PAM where it is amplified and routed to
the OCM. The HGB signal is then measured and converted to a digital format by a voltmeter-AID
converter. The digital value is then sent, via the CCM/OCM data bus, to the CCM for final processing.
Solenoid and Motor Subsystem

Solenoid control commands reside in firmware on the CCM. These commands are sent to the OCM
and then to the COM where they are multiplexed to the appropriate SOM (Solenoid Drive Module).
The SOM then provides the current to open and close individual drive solenoids.
Stepper Motor commands are handled in much the same manner as described above. However, the
final multiplexing of the Stepper Drive printed circuit boards is controlled by the MPM.
There are two pressure pump modules and one vacuum pump module in the CELL-DYN 1700.
These modules are described as follows:
1. A pressure pump provides air to bubble-mix samples in the Pre-Mixing Cup and the
mixing chambers of the von Behrens RBC/PLT and WBC Transducers. A pressure
regulator provides 0.5 psi for this process.
2. An unregulated pressure pump provides air to push waste from the waste bottles inside
the instrument to the waste container attached to the instrument and to apply back
pressure to clear the apertures in the von Behrens RBC/PLT and WBC Transducers.
3. 8" Hg vacuum container, vacuum sensor, and vacuum pump supply a constant vacuum to
the entire system to transport diluent, detergent, and lyse throughout the flow system and
to maintain a constant vacuum to the RBC/PLT and WBC metering tubes. A vacuum
regulator provides constant pressure to both metering tubes.

Section 3
THEORY OF OPERATION
Refer to Figure 3-3 for a diagram of the solenoid and motor drive
connections.
User Interface Computer Subsystem
The Use r Interface Computer is a PC-AT type 386 or 486 compute
r. The 386 board is manufactured
by DFI, and the 486 board is manufactured by Micronics. The
CPU operates at a clock speed of
between 25 ( 66 MHz depending on the board and configuration.
Table 3-1 gives a brief description of the motherboard.
CPU Intel 386SX, 25/33/40 MHz or

Intel 486DX, 33/66 MHz
BIOS AMI BIOS
ROM 128 KB
RAM 2 MB onboard RAM memory (SIMMs)
EPROM 2 pieces of 27256 ROM BIOS
AT keyboard interface; 8742 keyboard chip
Pin # Connector
1 keyboard clock
I/O Functions: 2 keyboard data
3 not connected
4 ground
5 +/- 5V
Table 3-1: PC Motherboard Configuration

1.44 MB FDD
Peripheral devices
270 (or higher) MB HOD
Slots 6 16-bit ISA slots
CMOS RAM 64 bytes for RTC
Display interface Super VGA
Hard/Floppy disk interface IDE
Table 3-1: PC Motherboard Configuration (Continued)

z M
o VALVE # VALVE FUNCTION ~
I
---~i--1---1
~
r-. RBC TRANSDUCER DRAIN M
1-2 RBC COUNT
CCM 1-3 RBC VENT
W SOM 1 1--- 1-4 RBCIWBC ISOLATOR VAC.
D. 1-5 RBCIWBC ISOLATOR DRAIN
o 1-6 RBCIWBC BACKFLUSH
NOT USED
LL NOT USED an
o 2-1 WBC METERING TUBE VENT
en
en
~
~
2-2 MIXING CHAMBER BUBBLE MIX
2-3 RBC CUP BUBBLE MIX ~
oW SOM 2 I--- 2-4 RBC TRANSDUCER FILL n:s
:::t:
2-5
2-6
RBC CUP DRAIN
HGB REFERENCE ...::::s
..Q
I- 2-7 HGB SAMPLE G)
2-8 DRAIN WASTE WELL (CS) LL
COM 3-1
3-2
3-3
PROBE WASH (NC)
PROBE WASH DRAIN
RBC CUP WASH
~
CO
SOM 3 I--- 3-4 MIXING CHAMBER WASH N
3-5 WBC TRANSDUCER DRAIN Q
3-6 WBC CUP VENT ~
~
3-7
3-8
DILUENT BUFFER PRIME (VAC.)
DRAIN TRANSFER CUP (CS)
en
4-1 DETERGENTINLET (NC)
4-2 SALINE INLET (NC)
4-3 WBC COUNT
SOM 4 I--- 4-4 WBC TRANSDUCER FILL
4-5 WBC CUP DRAIN
4-6 LYSE INLETIWBC CUP VAC,
4-7 WBC CUP BUBBLE MIX
4-8 WBC CUP WASH
5-1 WASTE BOTTLE 1 INLET

5-2 WASTE BOTTLE 1VACUUM
5-3 WASTE BOTTLE 1PRESJDRAIN
SOM 5 I--- 5-4 VACUUM TRANSFER
5-5 WASTE BOTTLE 2 INLET
5-6 WASTE BOTTLE 2 VACUUM
* DENOTES LAST
TWO DIGITS
5-7
5-8
WASTE BOTTLE 2 PRESJDRAIN
LYSE INLET (NC) -n:s
::::s
OF PART NUMBER c
n:s
LYSE SYRINGE VACUUM :e
REGULATOR VAC. PUMP G)
SYRINGE VALVE
u
.~
PRM
PRESSURE " G)
SALINE SYRINGE REGULATOR PRES. PUMP tn
PROBE ROTATE
,--
I
PRES. PUMP (0.8)
Q
Q
......
~
@
PROBE UP/DOWN
M Z
C >-
CI
o SAMPLE SYRINGE
...J
~G) Figure 3·3 Solenoid and Motor Drive Block Diagram SS00036A
...J
W
tn o
In addition to the motherboard, the User Interface Computer consists of the following components:
1. Data Link Adapter to interface with Cell Count Module
2. IDE Controller (for floppy and hard disk drives) and I/O board
3. InpuUOutput board
4. Super VGA board
5. Computer monitor
Figure 3-4 illustrates the major components of the User Interface Computer.
Data Link Ada.,pter (DLA).
The Data Link adapter provides interfaces from the PC motherboard to both the Cell Count Module
and the instrument key panel. Refer to Section 4 for a detailed description of the DLA.
IDE Controller and I/O Board
The IDE (Integrated Device Electronics) controller and 1/0 (InpuUOutput) board contains the interface
to both the hard and floppy disk drives, one serial port, and one parallel port. The cable to the hard
disk drive is a 40-pin connector and the cable to the floppy disk drive is a 34-pin connector. The board
must be jumpered so that the serial port is COM 1 and the parallel port is LPT1. If applicable, the
graphics printer must be connected to LPT1.
NOTE: If a LIS (Laboratory Information System) is installed, it must be connected to the COM1 port.

lnpuUOutput Board
The standard I/O board is a PC-AT type board with a serial port and parallel port. The serial port must
be jumpered to COM2 and the parallel port must be connected to LPT2. If applicable, the ticket
printer must be connected to LPT2.
Super VGA Board (SVGA)
The super VGA board operates in standard VGA mode: It has a 16 color capability and a standard
15-pin VGA connector. It must be plugged into a 16-bit slot. The board has no adjustment.
Computer Monitor
The computer monitor is a custom 14" color monitor from ELECTROHOME. It operates in 16 color
mode with a resolution of 640 x 480. The monitor has special shielding and the display adjustment
controls are mounted on the front directly below the screen. The controls from left to right are contrast,
brightness, height adjustment, screen position adjustment, and screen width adjustment.
The monitor has a built-in cable that is attached to the SVGA board. AC power comes directly from
the Linear (main) Power Supply.

DATA LINK TO
PC ANALYZER SUBSYSTEM (CCM)
POWER SUPPLY
..4 ..
HARD DISK
DRIVE
DATA LINK
PC MOTHERBOARD ADAPTER
FLOPPY DISK
DRIVE
PANEL
KEYBOARD
PARALLEL PORTS PC
SERIAL PORTS
KEYBOARD
I
SPARE
RS-232
COMM
TICKET
PRINTER
GRAPHICS
PRINTER SPEAKER SVGABOARD - DISPLAY
MONITOR
Figure 3·4 User Interface Computer SSOOO15A

Section 3 . THEORY OF OPERATION
AC and DC Power Distribution SUbsystem
The AC and DC functions of the power supply are handled by the PDM (Power Distribution Module).
The AC line is routed through a RF filter to a set of power selector switches which accommodate 100,
120, 220, and 240 VAC (50/60 Hz). The AC board routes 115 VAC to the Linear (main) Power Supply
and fans. The +12 VDC and +24 VDC used for solenoid drivers are fused at the Linear Power Supply.
None of these voltages are adjustable on the power supply.
NOTE: The +12VDC unregulated =16.5V nominal. The +24VDC unregulated = 34V nominal.
Refer to Figure 3-5.
.
The following voltages are supplied to the instrument by the Linear Power Supply:
• +15VDC (regulated) and -15VDC (regulated) to the analog electronics boards
• +100VDC (regulated) to the Pre-Amp Module
• +24VDC (unregulated) to close the solenoids
• +12VDC (unregulated) to hold the closed solenoids in position
The CPU Power Supply provides the following voltages which are routed to their final destinations by
the Power Distribution Module:
• +5VDC (regulated) to the PC motherboard
• +5VDC (regulated) to the digital logic boards
• +5VDC (regulated) to the Motor Processor Module
• +12VDC (regulated) to disk drives
• - 5VDC (regulated) to the PC motherboard
• -12VDC (regulated) to the PC motherboard
The 24V SWitching Module provides:
• +24VDC (regulated) to the Motor Processor Module via the Power Distribution Module
TO SOLENOID
DRIVE BOARDS +24V
SWITCHER
REGULATED
STEPPER
+ 12 UNREG & +24 UNREG CABLE MOTORS
DISTRIBUTION
MODULE ADJUSTABLE
LINEAR + 100 - ... PRE-AMP BOARD
~ ~~} ANALOG CIRCUIT BOARDS

POWER DIST MODULE
+ 5
PC
POWER
SUPPLY
- 5
+ 12
- 12 o +24V
MOTOR
FLOPPY DISK DRIVE PROCESSOR
PC MODULE
MOTHERBOARD +5V
HARD DISK DRIVE TO DIGITAL
LOGIC BOARDS
Figure 3-5 Power Distribution Block Diagram (STEPPER MOTORS) SS00016A

Section 4
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS
Table of Contents
4.2 PRE-AMPLIFIER MODULE (PAM)
4.3 MAIN AMPLIFIER MODULE (MAM)
4.4 SIGNAL PROCESSOR MODULE (SPM)
4.5 CELL COUNT MODULE (CCM)
Microprocessor Section
System Clock
6809E Microprocessor Support Circuits
PROM
RAM
VIA (Versatile Interface Adapter)
DMA (Direct Memory Access) Section
Pulse Height Memory (PHM)
Cell Counters
DMA Timing and Control
Interface to Microprocessor Bus
4.6 METERING MODULE

Section 4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS
4.7· DEVICE CONTROL MODULE (DCM)
4.8 CABLE DISTRIBUTION MODULE
4.9 SOLENOID DRIVER MODULE (SDM)
4.10 MOTOR PROCESSOR MODULE (MPM)
4.11 STEPPER DRIVE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
4.12 PRESSURENACUUM REGULATOR MODULE
4.13 LINEAR POWER SUPPLY MODULE
4.14 PC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
4.15 24V SWITCHING MODULE
4.16 PUMP RELAY MODULE (PRM)
4.17 USER INTERFACE COMPUTER (UIC)
4.18 DATA LINK ADAPTER (DLA)
Interface to CCM
Interface to Key Panel
List of Figures
Figure 4-1 Cell Pulse Classifications
Figure 4-2 MAM (Main Amplifier Module) Block Diagram
Figure 4-3 SPM (Signal Processor Module) Block Diagram
Figure 4-4 DLA (Data Link Adapter) Block Diagram

This section contains a description of the circuitry for the following printed circuit boards:
• Pre-Amplifier Module (PAM)
• Main Amplifier Module (MAM)
• Signal Processor Module (SPM)
• Cell Count Module (CCM)
• Metering Module
• Device Control Module (DCM)
• Cable Distribution Module (CDM)
• Solenoid Driver Module (SDM)
• Motor Processor Module (MPM)
• Stepper Drive Printed Circuit Board (SDP)
• PressureNacuum Regulator Module (PVRM)
• Linear Power Supply Module
• PC Power Supply Module
• 24V Switching Module
• Pump Relay Module (PRM)
• User Interface Computer (UIC)
• Data Link Adapter (DLA).

4.2 PRE-AMPLIFIER MODULE·(PAM)
Refer to Figure 3-2 in Section 3.

The PAM performs the following functions:
1. Provides RBC/PLT and WBC constant current
2. Amplifies the initial RBC/PLT, WBC, and HGB signals
Constant current bias (100VDC), switched by U8 and Q3, is routed to US which supplies constant cur-
rent to the von Behrens RBC/PLT Transducer. Two independent RBC/PLT current levels are con-
trolled by U8 and Q2, and PLT current is adjusted by R21.
U9 and associated circuitry provide constant current for the von Behrens WBC Transducer. R3S
adjusts WBC constant current. WBC guard voltage is supplied by U6.
U4 and U7 provide initial amplification of the RBC/PLT and WBC Transducer signals.
The output of the HGB Flow Cell is amplified by U1 and U2. HGB offset is adjusted by RS and HGB
:~
gain is adjusted by R12.
4.3 MAIN AMPLIFIER MODULE (MAM)
Refer to Figure 3-2 in Section 3 and Figures .4-1 and 4-2 in this section.
The Main Amplifier Module consists of the following major circuits:
1. WBC differential amplifier and main amplifier
2. RBC/PLT differential amplifier and main amplifier

3. RBC final stage amplifier
4. PLT final stage amplifier
5. Pulse editing circuit.
The WBC signal from the WBC pre-amp is received by the WBC differential amp, amplified by the
main amplifier then DC-restored by U4 before the final buffer amplifier. The signal then goes to the
Signal Processor Module (SPM).
The RBC/PLT composite signal from the RBC/PLT pre-amp is received by the RBC/PLT differential
amplifier, is amplified by the MAM, then DC-restored by U8 and split to the RBC and PLT final stage
amplifiers.
The RBC final stage amplifier has two amplification levels which are selected by the aperture current
select signal. The purpose of dual amp levels is to maintain a RBC output signal that is below satura-
tion in the high current mode but that still has adequate amplification during the low current mode.
Both amplifier levels are adjustable.
The PLT final stage is adjustable and should be set to a level 3.3 times greater than the RBC level.
Pulse editing is a technique that enables the MAM to distinguish between normal and abnormal cell
signals as shown in diagram (A) of Figure 4-1.
Normal cell signals are generated by cells that pass through or near the center of the aperture in a
straight line. Abnormal cell signals can be generated in several ways:
• a cell tumbling in the orifice (diagram (B) in Figure 4-1)
• more than one cell passing through the orifice at the same time (diagram (C) in Figure 4-1)
• cells that pass near the edge of the orifice (diagram D in Figure 4-1).

To determine which cells are valid, the height (H) of each cell pulse is measured and compared to the
area (A) under the signal envelope. In normal cell signal the area is less than the height (A < H).
1
HEIGHT (H)
B •
APERTURE
/
-\)~\.)~\.)"""'-------+.
1 AREA (A)
A B
TUMBLING
C- •• - - - - - - - . NORMAL
A .------- .
o .-------.
C D
COINCIDENCE EDGE EFFECT
Figure 4-1 Cell Pulse Classifications SS00017A

Figure 4-2 shows a block diagram of the pulse editing circuit. The RBC analog signal from the final
buffer amplifier, U2, goes to pin 3 of U15 and then to the follOWing places:
1. Peak Detector
2. Sample/Hold
3. Discriminator
4. Integrator
The peak detector, U19, signals the analog switch in the sample/hold circuit, U18, to hold the cell
peak until the flip flop, U21, is reset. The output of the sample/hold goes through a buffer amp to the
non-inverting input of comparator U17. The DC level represents the signal height "H" in the equation.
The discriminator, U17, distinguishes between noise and cell signals. Each time a cell signal is
detected, the output of the discriminator goes high, closing an analog switch, allowing only cell pulses
to be integrated by U25.
The integrator, U25, is used to determine the area under the signal envelope of each cell pulse. The
output of the integrator and buffer amp is kept at a DC level and represents the area "A" in the equa-
tion. The signal goes to the inverting input of comparator U17.
When the DC level of "H" is greater than the DC level of "A" the output of the comparator will be high.
The output of the comparator goes to one input of an AND Gate, U22. The other input is tied to the
a
output of the first one shot, U20. When the comparator is high, indicating valid cell signal, and the
one shot pulses high, the output of U22 will pulse low, generating a cell strobe. The cell strobe signal
goes to the Signal Processor Module (SPM) which is shown in Figure 4-3.

After the cell strobe pulses low, a second one shot pulses and resets the flip flop U21 and discharges
the integrator capacitor on U28.
4.4 SIGNAL PROCESSOR MODULE (SPM)
Refer to Figure 3-2 in Section 3 and Figure 4-3 in Section 4.

The SPM consists of the following main sections:
• WBC Sample and Hold (S/H)
• RBC S/H
• PlT S/H
• WBC or RBC/PlT Analog Switch
•. RBC or PLT Analog Switch
• RBC or PLT Selector
• AID Convector
Since one AID converter is used, a time sharing method is required to convert independent RBC, PlT,
and WBC signals. A six microsecond pulse (CEll ClK), generated on the CCM board, is used to
multiplex these independent signals.
The peak amplitudes of the WBC, RBC, and PlT pulses are stored in capacitors C19, C27, and C32,
respectively. When CELL ClK is high, analog switch (U2) transfers the WBC voltage to the analog
input of AID converter (U1), and when CEll ClK is low, the RBC or PlT voltage placed on the input.

U) en
z ~
-on.
l-
Q2
>wec SIG ~~ ~
U5 ~ wec ANALOG)
u
U) It)
w en
C OFFSET en
-'\M" or-
-::::»
I- R11
GAIN 1 ~
«J
u GAIN 2
::s
-UD:::
L.
.c
CI)
RBCANALOG u.
~
CO
N
Q
oqo
0r-
PLTANALOG~ en
TP14 S & H OUT

Rec S&H
U16 CELL STROBE
1JU
PEAKDET.
LATCH
U21
RESET
-::s
«J
~. I ONE SHOT I
U20
• lONE SHOT I
U20
• c
«J
:E
CI)
RESET Co)
.~
CI)
U)
"» • I U24~ • Q
Q
INTEGRATOR to-
or-
TP15 INTEG OUT @
z
~
o
c is•
..J
~
CI)
Figure 4-2 MAM Block Diagram SS00035A
..J
W
U) U
WBCANALOG
WBCS&H ,
PEAK AID DATA

DETECTOR rL U24")-
LATCH ') ,,"-CONVERT
8 "-
,/
U7 U8
WBCDISC. J 7
7 "-
,/
RBCANALOG
RBCS&H 6 "-
,/
ANALOG
PEAK
..() INPUT 5 "-
- U2 "- 9BIT ,/
DETECTOR AID
?I 4 "-
U1
RBC DISC. - ,/
- U4)-
U6~ 3 "-
CURRENT SELECT r U4 ) - LATCH
U12
'---
,/
2 "-
,/
PLTANALOG PLTUPPER ---4
DISC. 1
U3 ~~
"-
- ,/
PEAK U4 ""- 0
DETECTOR r-- ../ 0 "-
,/
PLTLOWER - -EOC
DISC. "-
CELL STROBE ,/
PLTS& H
Figure 4-3 SPM Block Diagram SSOOO18A

The RBC or PLT determination is controlled by the RBC/PLT signal which, in turn, is controlled by the
PLT Low (U28-13) and PLT HI (U28-14) discriminators and associated circuitry. When the thresholds
of both are exceeded, indicating an RBC pulse, the RBC/PLT signal is high and the RBC S/H voltage
is converted. When only the low threshold is exceeded, indicating a PLT pulse, the PLT S/H voltage is
converted.
When CELL CLK changes state, a conversion command signal is generated which starts the AID con-
version, and forces the end-of-conversion signal (EOC) high. Upon the completion of the AID conver-
sion, EOC returns low, and EOC, RBC/PLT, and 9-bits of AID conversion data are sent to the CCM.
4.5 CELL COUNT MODULE (CCM)

The primary function of the CCM is to count the cell pulses presented to it by the SPM (Signal Pro-
cessing Module). The CCM can be otherwise considered a general purpose microprocessor-based
process controller. Thus, the CCM consists of two main sections:
1. Cell counting logic
2. Microprocessor related circuitry
The cell counting section is a DMA (Direct Memory Access) approach to the counting and storing of
cell pulses per channel into the histogram data storage memory. At the end of the sampling interval,
the CCM program then reads out the accumulated counts per channel in the Pulse Height Memory
(PHM).
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-Februa~1995 4-11

The main sections of the CCM are:
1. Microprocessor Section
a. System clock
b. 6aOgE microprocessor & support circuits
c. EPROM for program storage
d. RAM for program data storage
2. VIA (Versatile Interface Adapter)
a. Real time clock
b. Interface to UIC
c. LED Function & Counting Control
3. DMA (Direct Memory Access) Section
a. Pulse Height Memory (PHM)
b. Cell Counter
c. DMA timing and control Interface to microprocessor bus
Microprocessor Section
System Clock
The CCM uses an a MHz oscillator (U10) that is divided by eight by a Johnson counter (U20) to pro-
vide 1 MHz system clocks for the 6aOgE microprocessor. The signals E and Q are provided to the
6aOgE by the Johnson counter. VUA (Valid User Address) is provided to pin 10 on the motherboard.

6809E Microprocessor Sur;wort Circuits
The data and address buffers of the 6809E are buffered by an LS640 (U33) inverting bi-directional
buffer for the data bus and two LS244 octal buffers (U34, U35) for the address bus. Address decod-
ing is done by four LS139 2 to 4 decoders (U23, U21).
A 555 timer (U 12) is used for the 6809E power-up reset. The 6809 may also receive an external reset
signal via pin 14 on the edge connector. This is the system-wide reset.
PROM
The EPROM used on the CCM (U37) is a 27C256, for 32K by 8 of program storage. A strappable
jumper selects the EPROM type.
RAM
The program RAM used on the CCM (U36) is a HM6264" (or equivalent), for 8K by 8 of program data
storage. A strappable jumper selects the RAM type. Jumper J5 must be set to 8K.
VIA (Versatile Interface Adapter)
The LSI (Large Scale Integration) interface used on the CCM is a 6522 VIA (U13). This device per-
forms a number of functions, as described below:
1. CCM Real Time Clock
One of the two 16-bit timer/counters in the VIA is used for the CCM real time clock. This time
base is always programmed to 1 millisecond (in current applications); it presents a repetitive
FIRQ interrupt to the 6809E. All process control functions, e.g., flow system timing, stepper
motor motions, sensor scanning rates, etc., are based on this timer. There should always be a
1 KHz frequency at test point TP5.

2. Interface to UIC
. The VIA is also used as an interface to the User Interface Computer (UIC). This interface uses
the A-side of the VIA for an 8-bit multi-byte parallel data transfer, with VIA signals CA2 and CA1
used as strobe and acknowledge for each byte sent/received.
The handshake for data block transfers is controlled by REQ2 and REQ1. In normal system
operation, the UIC will periodically set REQ210w to request CCM data/status, and the CCM will
answer by setting REQ1 low and keeping it low until all bytes (if any) have been sent.
3. LEO Function & Counting Control
The two LEOs for REQ1 and REQ2 (OS6, OS7) indicate the communication activity. They
directly relate to the hi/Ie state of REQ1 and REQ2. When OS6 is on, it indicates that REQ1 is
active; when OS7 is on, it indicates that REQ2 is active.
The LEOs OS1 through OS5 are entirely under program control. Their current use is as fol-
lows:
a. The CCM green LED (OS 1) should always be on after the CCM has successfully com-
pleted its internal power-on self-check diagnostics, otherwise there is a fundamental
CCM fault.
b. The LEOs CER and CEW (OS2, OS3) indicate the state of the CCM firmware
generated signals CER (count enable red) and CEW (count enable white). These
signals control cell counting. When the LED is on, the OMA cell counting circuitry is
active.
The LED OS4 is programmed to give a rough indication of the rate at which pulses are being
generated by the SPM. The LED OS5 is used to indicate that a self test is in progress.

DMA (Direct Memory Access) Section
Pulse Height Memory (PHMl
Two HM6116 2K by 8 static memory devices (U15 and U14) are used to store the pulse height
counts. The two memory devices are electrically set up as 2K bytes by 16 bits of addressable mem-
ory. Furthermore, this memory is divided into four functional blocks of 512 16-bit words. In normal
operation, these blocks hold the WBC, RBC (low current), Platelet, and RBC (high current) counts per
channel.·
The PHM is unique in 2 important ways. First, the CCM program can only read the memory or clear
the memory, it cannot store values into the memory (except for zero, by clearing it). Second, the CCM
program is blocked from reading the PHM memory while a DMA is in progress.
The DMA circuit, on the other hand, can read and write the memory directly, but it can only transfer
data to and from the
16-bit cell pulse counter.
Read/write control of the PHM is performed by an LS158 (U18), which acts as a DMA / MPU address
selector.
Cell Counters
The cell count values stored in the PHM are incremented by the four 4-bit counters (U29, U28, U27,
U26). These counters are cascaded and employed as a 16-bit pre-settable synchronous counter.

DMA Timing and Control
In order to process cell pulse data in a synchronous manner, a lower frequency cell-clock is generated
from the 1 MHz clock. An LS92 (U6) is used to divide the 1 MHz by 12. The output of this counter
(83.3 KHz) is presented to the SPM and is also used internally by the CCM. In effect, this synchro-
nizes the pulse processing A to D circuitry on the SPM with the pulse counting circuitry on the CCM.
An RBC/PLT orWBC cell pulse is processed within a 6 microsecond (Jls) time frame. WBC pulses are
handled when the cell clock signal is high; RBC, or PLT pulses are processed when the cell clock sig-
nal is low. This 6 Jls time includes the SPM A to D conversion time (about 1.8 to 2.4 Jls) and an inten-
tional SPM delay of 1 Jls before the start of conversion.
A pulse height (the A to D output) produced by the SPM is strobed into an LS374 latch (U 1) on the
CCM by the SPM's EOC (End-Of-Conversion) signal (pin 9 on J2 and TP7). Given that CER or CEW
is active, the arrival of this EOC signal also starts a CCM cell processing READ/COUNTIWRITE DMA
sequence that proceeds as follows:
1. The signal DMR (Direct Memory Read) is generated by an LS175 F/F (U2). This is a 1 Jls
pulse that is used to read the PHM data at the address specified by the pulse height and
the SPM RBC/PLT signal. This data is then loaded into the LS569 counters with a 125
nanosecond (ns) pulse. The signal DMW (Direct Memory Write) is then generated by
another LS175 F/F (U2). The DMW signal is a 1 Jls pulse that is used to control the data
write-back.
2. While DMW is high, a 500 ns pulse is generated to increment the 16-bit counter, and thus
count the cell having this particular size.
3. The output of the counters is ena~led onto the internal PHM data bus. The PHM Write
Enable signal (WE) is brought low to strobe the output of the counter back into the PHM at

the latched address specified by the pulse height and the SPM RBC/PLT signal.
Interface to Microprocessor Bus
The CCM firmware provides an address to the PHM via two LS244s (U16, U17) and reads the 16-bit
PHM output data via two LS374s (U30, U31).
It should be noted that only 15 bits are used for the cell count. Thus the CCM is designed to handle a
maximum of 32,767 counts (7FFF hex) in anyone channel.
4.6 METERING MODULE

Both RBC and WBC count times are measured by a precision glass metering tube in conjunction with
two infrared optical detectors (CR3/Q1) and (CR4/Q2). The volume of liquid within the metering tube
between the upper and lower optical switches is approximately 200 J.lL. This ensures that a precise
amount of sample is aspirated each sample cycle.
When there is no obstruction of light, the output (TP1-TP2) of the upper and lower detectors is approx-
imately 0.630 volts.
During the sample cycle, an inverted meniscus travels down the metering tube. As it passes the
upper detector, the curved shape bends the light away from the photo-transistor which causes the
output to pulse high (approximately 3.8 volts) and the computer to start the sample count. When the
meniscus passes the lower detector, the output again pulses high, causing the computer to stop the
sample count.

The LEO drive and output amplifiers are connected in a positive feedback configuration. Positive
feedback, supplied by a diode and·1 OK resistor, compensates for changes in light transfer and holds
the outputs at a constant low level. The time constant of a 1M resistor and a 22 Jlf capacitor slows the
response time of the feedback loop, thus ensuring adequate pulse width (>20 ms) when the meniscus
passes.
LEOs (OS 1-0S4) provide background illumination for the metering tube.
4.7 DEVICE CONTROL MODULE (DCM)

The OCM performs the following major functions:
1. System Analog Voltmeter
2. Self Test Pulse Generation
3. RBCIWBC Current Control
4. CCM to COM and MPM Oata and Control Interface
The voltmeter section of the OeM consists of U3, U7, U6, U10 and associated circuitry. Since the
voltmeter inputs are identical in theory, the Filtered HGB voltage will be used as an example.
The unknown HGB voltage is presented to the input of the comparator at U6-7. The computer then
monitors the comparator output via U3 and uses a successive approximation technique at U6-6 to
read the unknown voltage.

Section 4 Ai 111_ _IB 1M 44-1 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS
Self-test pulses are generated, under computer control, by U12. This chip also generates the Current
Select and Current On signals.
Data to and from the COM is interfaced by PIA (U4) via J2.
Serial Stepper Motor data to and from the MPM is interfaced by ACIA (U2) via J1.
4.8 CABLE DISTRIBUTION MODULE

The COM performs the following functions:
1. Status Sensor Interface
2. Control of Solenoid Driver Module
3. Pump Relay Module interface and control
4. Start Board Interface
The COM communicates with the DCM via the DCM/CDM data bus at J2. Analog outputs of the
Metering Modules are converted to TTL levels by comparators (U 12) and placed directly on the DCM/
COM data bus. Signals from the Pump Relay board, Probe Position Switches, and Start Board are
interfaced by Data Drivers (US, U10).
Data is interfaced to the Solenoid Driver Modules via J32. This data is then multiplexed by One-of-
Eight Decoders (U 1, U2) via J3, J4, J6, J7, and J9.
9140265A-February1995 4-19
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual
Vacuum and pressure control data is latched by U14 and routed to the Pump Relay Module via J11.
Pump status signals (Vac On, Pres On) are converted to TTL levels by U3 and placed on the data bus
by U5.
lEO drive signals are routed to the Start Board via J17. The start signal enters at J17 and is placed
on the data bus by U5.
4.9 SOLENOID DRIVER MODULE (SDM)

The purpose of the SOM is to provide drive current to the solenoids. Each SOM has eight Oarlington
drivers (Q1-Q8) which are individually controlled by data bits (00-07) and data latch (U3).
There are two power modes available for e~ch solenoid - activate (+24V) and hold (+12V). This is
controlled by the Hi ClK signal in conjunction with data bits (00-07) and the current control latch (U 1).
4.10 MOTOR PROCESSOR MODULE (MPM)

The MPM controls drive data to the Stepper Orive printed circuit boards and also provides self-test
capability for motor winding current. The MPM is comprised of the following major circuits:
1. Microprocessor
2. Program Control EPROM
3. I/O Peripheral Interface Adapter (PIA)

4. Direct Memory Access (DMA) Control
5. Motor Phase Latches
6. Motor Current Latches
7. Motor Winding Self Test
Control functions of the MPM are performed by microprocessor (U5).
The operating program for the microprocessor is stored in Program Control EPROM (U3).
Data communications between the DCM and MPM are controlled by I/O PIA (U6) and serial data is
interfaced via ACIA (U2) and Data Bus Connector (J1).
Phase data, motor direction, and step rate are stored in RAM (U7). This data is sent to the Motor
Phase Latches under control of the DMA Control circuitry, which consists of U11, U12, U15, U16,
U18, U21 and associated circuitry. The data is strobed into the appropriate Motor Phase Latch by
ALGO through ALG2.
The Motor Phase Latches U23, U26, and U29 provide phase data to the Stepper Drive printed circuit
boards. Each is an 8-Bit Addressable Latch which can control up to four Stepper Drive printed circuit
boards and subsequently four Stepper Motors.
Four levels of motor current for each motor is controlled by the Motor Current Latches (U22, U25, and
U28). Each latch can control up to four stepper drive printed circuit boards. Data is strobed into the
appropriate latch by WRO through WR2.

The Feedback- and Feedback+ inputs at J3 through J14 are connected, via resistors on the Stepper
Drive printed circuit board, to the stepper motor windings. This allows the circuitry consisting of U30,
U31, and U32 to monitor the winding current during an internal self-test. These values can be read by
the CCM to isolate a defective Stepper Drive or Stepper Motor.
4.11 STEPPER DRIVE PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
Refer to blocks 20, 23, and 24 off the MPM in Figure 3-3 in Section 3.
The Stepper Drive printed circuit board consists of two PBL 3717 motor drive chips. Each chip drives
a winding of the Stepper Motor. Bits 10 and 11 are used to control four motor current levels:
1. PO - High Current
2. P1 - Medium Current
3. P2 - Low Current
4. P3 - Current Off
Bits PHO and PH1 control motor phase and, therefore, direction and step-rate (velocity). Feedback+
and Feedback- are used to generate a motor self-test.
4.12 PRESSURENACUUM REGULATOR MODULE
Refer to Figure 3-3 in Section 3 and schematic 9630801.

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS
Section 4 --
4.13 LINEAR POWER SUPPLY MODULE
The Linear (Main) Power Supply module get:lerates the following voltages:
1. +12VDC - Cable Distribution Module
2. +24VDC - Cable Distribution Module
3. +100VDC - Pre-Amp Module
4. +15 & -15VDC - Analog Circuit Boards
Refer- to Figure 3-5 in Section 3.
4.14 PC POWER SUPPLY MODULE
The PC Power Supply module generates the following voltages:

1. +5VDC - Digital Circuitry and UIC
2. -5VDC - UIC Motherboard
3. +12VDC - Analog Circuitry and UIC
4. -12VDC - Analog Circuitry and UIC
The PC Power Supply also generates a Power Good signal which disables the computer (UIC) in the
event of a power failure or brown-out and prevents good data from being overwritten.
The +5VDC is adjusted by R39. All voltages are fixed.
9140265A-February1995 4-24
The voltages generated on the PC Power Supply are routed to their final destinations by the PDM
(Power Distribution Module).
4.15 24V SWITCHING MODULE
The +24VDC Switching Module regulates power to the Motor Processor Module, via the PDM, to drive
the Stepper Motors. Refer to Figure 3-5.
4.16 PUMP RELAY MODULE (PRM)

The PRM provides drive to the vacuum and pressure pumps, via three Solid State Relays: K1, K2,
and K3.
4.17 USER INTERFACE COMPUTER (UIC)
The User Interface Computer (UIC) is designed around an Intel-compatible 386SXlDX chip running at
25 - 40 MHz. (Future configuration may be a 486DX chip running at 33 or 66 MHz.) The UIC
receives power from the' Switching Power Supply via the Power Distribution Module and receives sta-
tus and measurement data from the CCM. The board contains EPROM, CMOS RAM, input/output
circuitry for the interface ports, and addressing circuitry.
The following components, described in Section 3 of this manual as part of the User Interface Com-
puter, are purchased OEM from commercial vendors:

1. IDE Controller (for floppy and hard disk drives) and I/O board
2. Input/Output board
3. Super VGA board
4. Computer monitor
No circuit description for these boards is included here. Refer to a standard computer reference man-
ual for more detailed information concerning these boards.
4.18 DATA LINK ADAPTER (DLA)
The Data Link Adapter provides interfaces from the 386/486 computer to both the CCM (Cell Count
Module) and the instrument (membrane) key panel. These two interfaces function independently,
under application software control. However, some of the circuits on the DLA board are shared. The
DLA uses an 82C55 PPI (Parallel Peripheral Interface) IC. Refer to Figure 4-4 for an illustration of the
DLA board.
Interface to CCM
A 20-pin ribbon cable connects the DLA to the CCM. This interface is a bi-directional, parallel inter-
face that is software-controlled at both ends. Data is transferred in 8-bit bytes on 8 data lines (DO-
D7) in one direction at a time. The UIC (User Interface Computer) initiates an inquiry message "hand-
shake on a periodic basis or when it has a command to send. The CCM responds by sending data or
replying to the command sent.

The interface is controlled cooperatively by the UIC and CCM according to the state of the handshake
signals. Refer to Section 4.5, Cell Count Module. The UIC will always send data first; the CCM will
respond by sending data back (if any is available). Thus, the 82C55 switches its A-port from input to
output and back to input during every message transaction.
The key handshake signals are REQ1 and REQ2. REQ2 going low will initiate the communicati.on
protocol. The CCM will respond by bringing REQ1 low. After the OLA has sent its data, it will bring
REQ2 high. Then the CCM will send its data.
Each byte received by the OLA will generate an IRQ. The application software responds to the IRQ
by putting the byte into a buffer. When the CCM brings REQ1 high, the communication is complete;
the OLA will return to an idle state, and port A will be set to input. Both REQ1 and REQ2 will remain
high until the next message/data transfer.
The two LEOs on the printed circuit board, OS1 and OS2; indicate the active state of REQ2 and
REQ1, respectively. They should always be flickering when the application software is running
because the UIC program is constantly polling the CCM to check its state. (There are some excep-
tions to this during power up and certain diagnostics/test modes.)
The 1-0 address of the OLA board is assigned by four jumpers. The default 1-0 address (pins 3 - 6
on S1 hard-wired) is: [off off on offJ, 340 hexadecimal. The OLA interrupt level is assigned by a
.
Jumper.

Section 4 . . CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS
JumpersW1 - W6 assign the DLA interrupt to one of the following:
W1: IRQ5*
W2:1 RQ 10
W3:1 RQ 10
W4:1 RQ 11
W5:1 RQ 12
W6:1 RQ 15
* Since IRQ 5 is used by the DLA, W1 is hard-wired (this is the default).

IRQ
INTERRUPT
CONTROL CONN
TO
CCM
8BIT DATA BUS - PORT A
AEN
82C55
PPI
PORTB
I 8BIT DATA BUS - PORT B
PORTC
lOW CONN
BOARD TO
lOR SELECT KEY
LOGIC PANEL
4 BIT BUS MATRIX
ADDRESS
AO-A9
PC BUS
CONN - (16 BIT)
Figure 4-4DLA (Data Link Adapter) Block Diagram SS00019A

·Section 4 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTIONS
Interface to Key Panel
A 14-pin ribbon cable connects the DLA to the key panel. The key panel is also polled by the UIC pro-
gram. This interface is not interrupt-controlled.
The key panel is interfaced as a parallel switch matrix circuit with 4 lines out and 8 lines in. Four scan
rows are driven active one at a time via an LS 175 latch. Then the columns of the key panel matrix are
read from port B of the 82C55. The software interprets a low active signal as a key is pressed.
The DLA board must be plugged into a 16-bit slot. There are no adjustments on the DLA board.

Section 5
DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Table of Contents
5.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
5.2 DIAGNOSTICS MENU USAGE
Level One
Level Two
Level Three
Level Four
5.3 FAULT REPORT DESCRIPTION
5.4 CELL-DYN 1700 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Troubleshooting Chart
Nonfunctional Instrument Problems
Video Display Problems
Displayed Error and Fault Problems
Data Problems
Clog and Flow Error Problems
Miscellaneous Problems
5.5 RAW DATA DESCRIPTION
Raw Data DisplayDescription

Section 5 I§ ,,*w
5.6 CCM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LEDS
LED Definition
LED Notation
Examples of Normal Situations
Examples of Bad Situations
Power-on Tests
5.7 CPU HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
RS-232 Communications Test Procedure
CMOS Setup
Setup Screen
AMI BIOS
5.8 SERVICE SPECIAL COMMANDS-
Discussion
DIAGNOSTICS Menu Service Code Function List
Probe Check
Auto-Cycling {Code 999)
5.9 SAMPLE PROBE DESCRIPTION
Service DEC Codes 128, 129, a.nd 130 Descriptions
Service DEC Code 128
Motor Direction Commands
Sample Probe Normal Operation
Initialization Mode
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995, 5-2
Section 5 DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Stepper Motor Homing
Run Mode
Switch Failure Descriptions
5.10 CELL-DYN 1700 ERROR MESSAGES
Count Test
Operator-Correctable Alarm or Fault Messages
Summary of Error Messages
5.11 SOFTWARE COMMANDS AND SEQUENCE
CD1700 File and Directory Structure
Accessing DOS
CD1700 Program Loaded
CD1700 Program Not Loaded
Exiting DOS
Common DOS Commands
DOS Command Usage
Change Drives
Change Directories/Files Within a Drive
Make a New Directory
Remove a Directory
Compare
Copy
Delete a File
Undelete a File
Rename a File
View Files in a Directory
EW
==
Software Installation/Upgrades
List of Tables
Table 5-1 Disk Drive Setup Information
Table 5-2 DEC Service Commands
Table 5-3 Motor Power Specifications
Table 5-4 Motor Direction Commands
Table 5-5 Motor Speed Commands
Table 5-6 Error Messages
Table 5-7 Event Messages During Diagnostic Menu Count Test
Table 5-8 Operator-Correctable Alarm or Fault Messages
Table 5-9 Summary of Error Messages
List of Figures
Figure 5-1 Smoothing ON/OFF Example
Figure 5-2 Raw Data Example
Figure 5-3 AMI BIOS
Figure 5-4 Motor Power Test
Figure 5-5 Probe Up/Down Initialize and Run Cycle
Figure 5-6 Probe Initialize Mode

===
M
Figure 5-7 Probe Rotate Run Mode

Figure 5-8 Lower Switch (#1) Fault Report
Figure 5-9 Upper Switch (#2) Fault Report
Figure 5-10 Left Switch (#3) Fault Report
Figure 5-11 Right Switch (#4) Fault Report

This section is designed to aid the service representative in the troubleshooting and repair of the
CELL-DYN 1700/1700CS System. Emphasis is placed on using various System Status and Fault
Reports, which can be accessed by the service representative, to solve problems. Special Service
Commands are also available to exercise and observe mechanical and electronic functions.
5.2 DIAGNOSTICS MENU USAGE
Utilization of the DIAGNOSTICS Menu enables the operator or service representative to identify and
correct both operator-correctable and service-correctable faults. When the computer senses a fault,
the message <NOT READY: SEE DIAGNOSTICS> is displayed in the System Status Box on the
RUN Menu. The following keys are available in the DIAGNOSTICS Menu.
Level One
• INITIALIZATION: Used to perform an Initializa~ion cycle: returns movable components to

"home" position and performs internal self-tests.
• RAW DATA: Used to display raw measurement data for the last specimen.
• COUNT TEST: Used to run specimens without returning to RUN Menu and display
Raw Data.
• MORE: Used to display additional functions.
• PRINTER OUTPUT: Used to toggle printer output ON and OFF.

Section 5
Level Two
• WBC HISTOGRAM: Used to display WBC count and histogram data accumulated in each
of 256 size channels.
• RBC HISTOGRAM: Used to display RBC histogram data accumulated in each of 256 size
channels.
• PLT HISTOGRAM: Used to display PLT count and histogram data accumulated in each of
256 size channels.
• SMOOTHING ON/OFF: Used to toggle histogram display status. With Smoothing Off, only
raw counts are displayed. With Smoothing On, channels are numbered, data is normalized
and the number of the peak channel is shown. Figure 5-1 gives an example of Smoothing
On/Off.
Level Three
• PROBE HOME: Moves Sample Probe up and above RBC Cup.
• PROBE UP: Moves Sample Probe up.
9140265A-February1995 5-7
Sec tion 5
CELL-DYN 1700 DIAGNOSTIC REPORT

Nov 2819 94· 11:55 am
Opera tor 10 - - -
Seque nce # 261
PLT Histogram data smoot hing

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 55 53 50 49 50 52 53 50
0 0 0 0 86 84 69 58
17 59 63 64 70 70 73 74 75
51 53 55 55 57 58 58 59
33 85 88 84 84 83 86 86 86
77 76 79 82 82 84 84 84
49 98 98 .100 98 96 96 97 97
87 89 90 91 94 96 99 99
65 72 69 68 69 67 65 62 61
93 88 87 81 78 76 75 72
81
6 6 5 5 0 0 0 0 0
9 9 9 9 8 8 6
241
Peak of 100 at chann el 75
SMOOTHING OFF EXAMPLE

0 0 0 0 0 2 18 54 48
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 11 7 8 10 10 9 13 15
22 19 17 14 6 9 6
11 14 10 17 12 14 16 14
12 6 12 10 14 10 8 14
16 13 19 25 13 20 16 14 21
18 15 27 16 19 10 17
16 24 28 17 30 22 23 21 21
25 15 14 16 19 18 16
13 16 10 13 18 17 12 17
16 20 10 14 17 18 18 9
Figu re 5-1: Smoothing ON/OFF Example
914 026 5A-F ebru ary1 995 5-8

CEL L-DY N® 1700 Serv ice Man ual
Section 5
Level Four
• SYSTEM STATUS: Used to display or print current status.
• FAULT REPORT: Used to display or print a fault report.
• SERVICE HEX CODES: Not used for operator or service troubleshooting.
• SERVICE DEC CODE: Used to initiate individual actions in the CELL-DYN 1700 hardware
and software.
5.3 FAULT REPORT DESCRIPTION
A detailed list of all faults generated by the CELL-DYN 1700 software and hardware is contained in
Section 5.10. The fault classifications reported in the Fault Report primarily contains data pertaining
to the last CCM fault.
If a fault occurs, pressing the [HELP/ERROR] key will immediately display the Fault Log in the DIAG-
NOSTICS Menu. This log may contain up to 16 faults, with the current fault leading the list. An alter-
native procedure is to go to the MAIN MENU and press [DIAGNOSTICS]. In this case, the Fault
Report, not the Fault Log, is immediately displayed.
9140265A-February1995 5-9
DIAGNOS TICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Sec tion 5
MENU press [DIA GNO STIC S] fol-
To view the Fault Log when no fault is pending, from the MAIN
up to 16 past faults. Press [FAU LT
lowed by [HEL P/ER ROR ] and [HE LP]. The system will display
<NO FAU LTS OR WAR NIN GS
REPORT] to display the FAULT REPORT screen. A display of
PENDING> indicates that all faults have been cleared.
5.4 CELL-DYN 1700 TRO UBL ESH OOT ING GUIDE

the mos t common problems encoun-
A list of symptoms, probable causes, and corrective actions for
rt below. The probable causes and
tered on the CELL-DYN 1700 is given in the Troubleshooting Cha
likely to least likely. When trouble-
corrective actions are arranged in descending order from most
shooting a problem, start with the mos t likely cause first.
re replacement. Some problems can
If possible, thoroughly verify that a component is defective befo
Meter).
be verified visually, but other problems require a DVM (Digital Volt
parameters RBC, PLT, WBC, HGB,
When troubleshooting "DATA PROBLEMS", only the measured
meters can become confusing
and MCV should be used for reference. Using the calculated para
when trying to isolate a problem.
, refer to Figure 8-1 in Section.8 for
When troubleshooting "CLOG AND FLOW ERROR PROBLEMS"
er (T1) and Lower (T2) times.
the "MIN" and "MAX" specifications for the RBC and WBC Upp
914 026 5A-F ebru ary1 995 5-10

CEL L-DY N® 1700 Serv ice Man ual
Section 5
Troubleshooting Chart
Nonfunctional Instrument Problems
PROB. CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
SYMPTOM
1. NO FUNCTS. 1. FUSE 1. CHECK FUSE
NO FANS
2. POWER CORD 1. CHECK POWER CORD
3. POWER. 1. CHECK POWER

SOURCE SOURCE
1. NO 5VDC 1. CHECK PC POWER

2. NO FUNCTS.
FANS RUN SUPPLY
2. VDM SHORT. 1. REPLACE VDM

A.C. POWER
Video Display Problems
PROB. CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
SYMPTOM
1. CRT BLANK 1. BRIGHT. CONT. 1. INCREASE
SOLENOIDS OK BRIGHTNESS
2. DEFECT. VDM 1. REPLACE VDM
1. HORIZ. CONT. 1. ADJUST FRONT LINE ON CRT

2. HORIZONTAL
CONTROLS
9140265A-February1995 5-11
·.·...·,.•.,·.t.'.·...

Section 5 liZ
SYMPTOM PROB.·CAUSE
2. DEFECT. VDM
3. VERTICAL 1. VERT. CONT.
LINE ON CRT
2. DEFECT. VDM
4. DOT IN CNTR. 1. MISADJUST.
OF CRT
2. DEFECT. VDM
5. ROLLING 1. MISADJUST.
IN VERT.
2. DEFECT. VDM
6. NONLINEAR 1. MISADJUST.
IN VERT.
2. DEFECT. VDM
7. INCORRECT 1. MISADJUST.
2. DEFECT. VDM
8. INCORRECT 1. MISADJUST.
HORIZ. WIDTH
9140265A-February1995 5-12
Section 5
CORRECTIVE ACTION
SYMPTOM
1. REPLACE VDM
1. ADJUST FRONT
9. CHARACTERS
CONTROLS
OUT OF FOCUS
10. CHARACT. OK 1. VIDEO CABLE 1. CHECK VIDEO CABLE

BUT GARBLED
2. DEFECT. SVGA 1. REPLACE SVGA BOARD
4. DEFECT. UIC 1. REPLACE UIC
11. MISSING 1.. VIDEO CABLE 1. CHECK VIDEO CABLE

CHARACTERS

1. CHECK VIDEO CABLE
12. MISS HORIZ 1. VIDEO CABLE
OR VERT LINES

9140265A-February1995 5-13
Section 5 CORRECTIVE ACTION
SYMPTOM PROS. CAUSE
Qls.played Error and Fault Problems

SYMPTOM PROS. CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
1. DET EMPTY 1. RESTRICTION 1. CHECK LINES

2. CHECK SOL 4-1
2. DEFECTIVE
SENSOR 1. CHECK SENSOR
2. REPLACE SENSOR
3. DEFECT. COM 1. REPLACE COM
1. SOL 3-1 1. CHECK SOL 3-1

2. OIL. EMPTY
TUBING
2. RESTRICTION 1. CHECK LINES
2. CHECK SOL 4-2
3. DEFECT. 1. CHECK SENSOR

SENSOR 2. REPLACE SENSOR
9140265A-February1995 5-14
Section 5
CORRECTIVE ACTION
SYMPTOM
3. PRESSURE 1. CHECK SOL 3-3
OVERLIMIT 2. REPLACE SOL 3-3
2. SOLENOID 3-4 1. CHECK SOL 3-4

2. REPLACE SOL 3-4
3. SOLENOID 3-1 1. CHECK SOL 3-1
2. REPLACE SOL 3-1

4. DEFECTIVE
SWITCH 1. CHECK SWITCH
2. REPLACE SWITCH
4. VAC LO ERR 1. LEAK 8" HG 1. CHECK PLUMBING
2. DEFECT. PUMP 1. REPLACE PUMP
3. DEFECT. 1. REPLACE REG

VACREG
5. PRES LO ERR 1. LEAK 0.6 PSI 1. CHECK PLUMBING
2. DEFECT. PUMP . 1. REPLACE PUMP
3. DEFECT. 1. REPLACE REG

PRES REG
9140265A-February1995 5-15
SYMPTOM PROB. CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
6. WASTE OVRFL 1. NO AIR PRES. 1. CHECK PRESSURE
INTO ACCUM 2. REPLACE PUMP
3. REPLACE CDM
2. SOL 5-3 STUCK 1. CHECK SOL 5-3
2. REPLACE SOL 5-3
3. SOL 5-7 STUCK 1. CHECK SOL 5-7
2. REPLACE SOL 5-7
4. SENSOR NOT
DETECTING 1. CHECK SENSOR
2. REPLACE SENSOR
3. REPLACE CDM
7. WASTE EMPTY 1. DEFECTIVE
TIMEOUT SENSOR 1. CHECK SENSOR
2. REPLACE SENSOR
2. AIR PRESSURE 1. CHECK PRESSURE
LOW 2. REPLACE PUMP
3. RESTRICTION 1. CHECK PLUMBING
4. DEFECT. CDM 1. REPLACE CDM

8. CCM/UIC 1. UIC/CCM CABLE
DISCON. 1. CHECK UIC/CCM
CABLE
2. DEFECT. 1. REPLACE UIC/CCM
UIC/CCM CABLE CABLE
3. DEFECT. CCM 1. REPLACE CCM BOARD
BOARD
4. DEFECT. DLA 1. REPLACE DLA BOARD
BOARD
9. DISK ERRORS 1. DEFECT. UIC 1. CHECK CMOS SETUP
2. CHECK UIC/CCM
CABLE
3. REPLACE UIC
2. DEFECT. DISK 1. REPLACE DISK DRIVE
DRIVE
10. POSITION 1. MISALIGN 1. PERFORM
FAULTS SWITCH ALIGNMENT
2. DEFECT. 1. REPLACE SWITCH
SWITCH AND PERFORM ALIGNMNT

4. DEFECT. 1. RUN MOTOR POWER
TEST
DRIVE PRINTED 2. REPLACE DRIVE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD CIRCUIT BOARD
5. DEFECT. 1. EXERCISE PROBE
SAMPLE PROBE
ASSEMBLY
2. REPLACE ASSEMBLY
6. DEFECT. 1. RUN MOTOR POWER R
MOTOR TEST
2. REPLACE MOTOR
Data Problems
1. ALL RESULTS 1. NO +/- 15VDC 1. CHECK +/- 15VDC
ARE "0" 2. REPLACE PSM
2. HGB OK ALL 1. NO 100VDC 1. REPLACE PSM
OTHERS "0"
2. DEFECT. SPM 1. REPLACE SPM

3. DEFECT. PAM 1. REPLACE PAM
3. HGB "0" ALL 1. NO REF. 1. CHECK PLUMBING
OTHERS OK ASPIRATION
2. NO SAMPLE 1. CHECK PLUMBING
ASPIRATION
3. DEFECT. PAM 1. CHECK PAM TP2
2. REPLACE PAM
4. DEFECT. DCM 1. CHECK DCM TP5
2. REPLACE DCM
5. DEFECTIVE 1. REPLACE FLOW
FLOW CELL CELL
4. ERRATIC DATA 1. BUBBLE MIX 1. CHECK BUBBLE MIX
ALLPARAMS INCORRECT PRESSURE
2. CHECK PLUMB.
2. INCORRECT 1. CHECK PROBE
PROBE HEIGHT HEIGHT
2. ADJUST PROBE HEIGHT
3. INADEQUATE 1. CHECK PLUMBING
PROBE CLEANING

4. IMPRECISE 1. CHECK SAMPLE
SAMPLE SYRINGE
ASPIRATION 2. CHECK PLUMBING
5. IMPRECISE 1. CHECK DILUENT
DILUENT DISP. SYRINGE
2. CHECK PLUMBING
5. ERRATIC DATA 1. DEFECT. SPM 1. REPLACE SPM
HGBOK
6. ERRATIC RBC 1. DIRTY TRANS. 1. CLEAN TRANSDUCER
& PLT, WBC OK
2. INCORRECT 1. CHECK RBC
BUBBLE MIX PLUMBING
7. ERRATIC WBC 1. 01 RTY TRANS. 1. CLEAN TRANSDUCER
RBC AND PLT OK
2. INCORRECT 1. CHECK WBC BUBBLE MIX
PLUMBING

8. ERRATIC HGB 1. DIRTY FLOW 1. CLEAN FLOW
OTHERS OK CELL CELL
2. AIR LEAK 1. CHECK PLUMBING
3. DEFECTIVE 1. REPLACE FLOW
FLOW CELL CELL
9. ERRATIC MCV 1. DIRTY TRANS. 1. CLEAN TRANSDUCER
AND HCT
2. DIL. BRIDGE 1. SHIM RBC CUP
10. WBC "R" 1. DIRTY TRANS. 1. CLEAN TRANSDUCER
CODE, REAGNTS.
OK 2. INCORRECT 1. CHECK VOLUME
LYSE VOLUME 2. ADJUST VOLUME
3. INCORRECT 1. CHECK BUBBLE
BUBBLE MIX MIX PRESSURE
2. CHECK PLUMBING
4. SLOW TRANS. 1. CHECK PLUMB.
TOWBCCUP
5. INCORRECT 1. CHECK GAIN
GAIN 2. ADJUST GAIN

11. HI BKGNDS, 1. "DIRTY" PWR 1. CHECK POWER
REAGENTS OK 2. ISOLATE LINE
3. INSTALL FILTER
2. POOR 1. CHECK GROUNDING
GROUNDING
2. INSTALL GROUND
3. "NOISY" PSM 1. CHECK PSM
2. REPLACE PSM
12. HI BKGNDS 1. INCORRECT 1. CHECK BUBBLE
WBCONLY BUBBLE MIX MIX PRESSURE
REAGENTS OK 2. ADJUST PRESSURE
2. SPM 1. INSTALL
Clog and Flow Error Problems
1. "CLOG" 1. TRANSDCRS 1. CHECK TRANSDUCERS
BOTH SIDES REVERSED 2. REINSTALL
CONSTANT

2. INCORRECT 1. CHECK VACUUM
VACUUM 2. ADJUST VACUUM
3. DILUENT AS 1. CHECK REAG LINES
DETERGENT
2. "CLOG" 1. RESTRICTION 1. CHECK VENT PLUMB.
T1 =MAX T2=O,
NO VENT 2. CHECK VENT SOL.
3. "CLOG" 1. DIRTY TRANS. 1. CLEAN TRANSDUCER
T1=MAXT2=O ,
NO MENISCUS 2. RESTRICTION 1. CHECK PLUMBING
2. CHECK COUNT SOL.
3. CHECK VENT SOL.
4. CHECK APERTURE
4. "CLOG" 1. DIRTY TRANS. 1. CLEAN TRANSDUCER
T1=MAXT2=O
SLOW MENISCUS 2. RESTRICTION 1. CHECK PLUMBING
2. CHECK COUNT SOL.
3. CHECK VENT SOL.
4. CHECK APERTURE
3. INCORRECT 1. CHECK VACUUM
VACUUM 2. ADJUST VACUUM

5. "CLOG" 1. DEF UPPER 1. CHECK UPPER T2=O
T1=MAX DET DET
MENISCUS SPEED 2. REPLACE MET PRINTED
OK CIRCUIT BOARD
6. "CLOG" 1. DEF LOWER 1. CHECK LOWER
T1=OK DET DET
T2=MAX 2. REPLACE MET PRINTED
MENISCUS SPEED OKCIRCUIT BOARD
7. "FLOW ERR" 1. DEF UPPER 1. CHECK UPPER
T1=MIN DET DET
T2=MAX 2. REPLACE MET PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD
8. "FLOW ERR" 1. DEF LOWER 1. CHECK LOWER
T1=OK DET DET
T2=MIN 2. REPLACE MET PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD

Miscellaneous Problems
1. GARBLED 1. DEFECT. SPM 1. REPLACE SPM
HISTOGRAMS
2. DEFECT. CCM 1. REPLACE CCM
5.5 RAW DATA DESCRIPTION
From the MAIN MENU, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [RAW DATA]. The [RAW DATA] key will
display raw data obtained from the last count cycle.
When a single count is done, all data is contained in the first column. When a PLT recount occurs,
data from the first cycle appears in column #2 and data from the recount appears in column #1.
Raw Data Display Description

RBC, WBC and PLT counts are RAW, uncorrected total counts.
HGB Error is not used.
HGB Reference is the output of the AID Converter when reading Reference (2000 =5 volts).
HGB Sample is the output of the AID Converter when reading Sample (2000 =5 volts).
WBC and RBC Up Times are the upper times in milliseconds for the last sample.
WBC and RBC Count Times are the times in milliseconds for the last sample.

Flow Error is coded Clog or Flow Error data.
RBC RER is RBC Cell Editing percentage.
WBC and RBC Upper max and Upper min are the maximum and minimum Upper Times, respectively.
WBC and RBC Avg. Time are the averages of the previous count times.
WBC and RBC Time-Outs are the floating Upper Clog Alarm Limits calculated by the "Running Aver-
age Program".
An example of a raw data report is shown in Figure 5-2.
5.6 CCM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC LEDS
The seven LEOs on the CELL-OYN 1700 CCM can reveal much about the fundamental CCM and
overall machine state. In general, the LEOs indicate whether the CCM is in a normal functioning
mode or in a fault state, and in either case, help to characterize the CCM state. Also, one of the LEOs
gives some information about the state of the UIC as well.
The CCM tests itself on power-up. These fundamental tests include ROM, RAM, and VIA. If any test
fails, the CCM will attempt to execute a routine which will flash the green LED on the board. Also, it
will place a 4-bit fault code into the adjacent yellow LEOs.

CELL-DYN 1700 DIAGNOSTIC REPORT
Nov 28 1994 5:05 pm

Operator 10 - - -
Sequence # 27
C01700 Serial #
UIS: Version 1.0
----
CD1700 Test Data
WBC Count 51
RBC Count 2 RBC RER: 100.0%
PLT Count 6
Hgb Error o
Hgb Reference 2048
Hgb Sample 2045
WBC Up time 1985 WBC Upper max 1985 Upper min 1985
WBC Cnt time 4752 WBC Time-out 6500 Avg. time 4752
RBC Up time 5171 RBC Upper max 5171 Upper min 5171
RBC Cnt time 6854 RBC Time-out 7500 Avg. time 6854
Flow Error 0000
UIS: Version 1.0 File date code: 1994-10-27 16:30

CCM ROM Version: 6 VO.98 10-22-94 CD1700
MPM ROM Version: V1.1 05-01-91
DOS Version: 5.0
BIOS Version: 07/07/91
Figure 5-2: Raw Data Example

LED Definition
Lowest Highest
DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS?
DS1 (green) program controlled, used for CCM go/no go board status.
DS2 through DS5, program controlled, general use is for cell count status; on power up, used for fault
codes.
DS6 program controlled, indicates CCM has requested to send a message.
DS? controlled by UIC, indicates UIC has requested to send a message.
LED is off
green LED on, not flashing
green LED flashing slowly (approx. 1 Hz)
yellow LED on, not flashing
yellow LED fast-flickering
yellow LED flashing at slow, non-periodic rate
Examples of Normal Situations

LED Pattern Description

g - - - - yf yf Typical operational state. Green LED is on. Right-most two yellow LEDs are
flashing at fast-flicker, showing UIC/CCM communications. Pattern when
machine is idle (even in STANDBY).
g - - - - ys ys Active operational state. Green LED is on. Rightmost two yellow LEDs are
flashing at slowflicker, showing UIC/CCM communication slowed while CCM
is busy with some process.
g y - - - ys ys Active operational state. RBC cells are being counted.
g - y - - ys ys Active operational state. WBC cells are being counted.
g------ If in either state for no more than approximately thirty seconds, then UIC is
busy, most likely with disk access, e.g., loading a program. State of CCM not
apparent.
Examples of Bad Situations

LED Pattern Description I Probable Cause
------- CCM is non-functional. UIC is also non-functional or time-out. (Loss of +5V
power?)
g-----y CCM failed; is non-functional. UIC is attempting to communicate.
gyyyy-y CCM failed; is non-functional.
or
gyyyy-- Most likely got a partial reset which reset the VIA.

g------ If in this state for more than thirty seconds, then UIC is non-functional; it has
failed or has timed-out. If display indicates time-out, then suspect that the
CCM failed, and its failure led to UIC Time-out.
g----y- If in this state for more than thirty seconds, and if display indicates time-out,
then most likely CCM failed, and its failure led to UIC Time-out. CCM was
busy at the time of failure.
Power-on Tests
1. gs - - - y - y CeM failed ROM test, on 1st checksum byte.
2. gs - - y - - Y CCM failed ROM test, on 2nd checksum byte.
3. gs - - y y - Y CCM failed VIA test, register checked
(DDRA).
4. gs - Y - - - Y CCM failed VIA test, register checked (IER).
5. gs - Y - Y - Y CCM failed VIA test, register checked (IFR).
6. gs - Y Y - - Y CCM failed VIA test, register checked (VCR).
7. gs - Y Y Y - Y CCM failed VIA test, register checked (DDRB).
8. gs Y - - - - Y CCM failed RAM test, walking 1IS.
9. gs Y - - Y - Y CCM failed RAM test, on clearing to zero.

5.7 CPU HARDWARE/SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
RS-232 Communications Test Procedure

Detailed information on the CELL-DYN 1700 RS-232 specifications is contained in Appendix C of this
service manual. For testing the COM1 port, it is recommended that a commercial program, such as
QAPlus© or CHECK(IT PRO, be used.
CMOS Setup
The CMOS Setup contains all the information needed by the BIOS system to establish proper com-
munications between the motherboard and the various computer system devices. The configuration
for the current motherboard is listed below:
Part No.
Current motherboard 1700019
IDE hard drive 2005712
IDE controller 1700021

The disk drive setup information is listed in Table 5-1 below
Table 5-1: Disk Drive Setup Information
Type Cycl Head WP LZ Sect Size
(MB)
Hard Disk
47 944 14 65535 65535 40 258
Drive C
Floppy
Disk Drive NA NA NA NA NA 1.44
3.5"
Setup Screen
The Setup screen is the user interface to the Basic Input-Output System (BIOS) which resides on the
battery backed-up CMOS RAM chip on the motherboard. The Setup screen is used to input the hard-
ware configurations of the various devices, so that the BIOS can set up proper communications within
the computer.
The BIOS currently shipped on the CELL-DYN 1700 was developed by American Megatrends Inc.
(AMI). The AMI BIOS setup is illustrated in Figure 5-3.

AMI BIOS
The only way to gain access to the AMI BIOS setup (in DOS) is through the "Boot" cycle. A message
is displayed at the beginning of the Boot cycle that prompts the user to press the Delete key to enter
the Setup screen. Pressing the Delete key during the "time window" allowed by the software is the
only requirement for entering the Setup screen. (Refer to Section 5.11.)
NOTE: At any C prompt, simultaneously pressing the Control, Alt and Delete keys will re-boot the
system and provide an opportunity to enter the Setup screen.
5.8 SERVICE SPECIAL COMMANDS
Discussion
Several commands are available to initiate individual actions in the CELL-DYN 1700 hardware and
software. These commands are used for troubleshooting and/or alignment when a single action is
desired or required to be repeated several times.
The special command mode resides in the DIAGNOSTICS Menu. From the MAIN Menu, press
[DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [SERVICE DEC CODE]. When this softkey is pressed, the message
<SERVICE FUNCTION ONLY: ENTER COMMAND:> is displayed.
A command can now be entered. Pressing the Enter key on the keyboard will initiate the action. Only
one command can be entered at a time and [SERVICE DEC CODE] must be pressed before a com-
mand is entered.
All commands available by direct softkey can be accessed by pressing [MORE].
NOTE: Use only the commands listed in Table 5-2 and always verify that the correct number has been
entered before initiating the action. Use only those numbers listed below. Other numbers may
refer to engineering commands which are not to be used in the field and which may cause dam-
age if used improperly. Be fully aware of the purpose of any of the following commands before
using them. This is a direct-activation method which should be used with caution because the
physical state of the CELL-DYN 1700 may not be in agreement with the function to be per-
formed. After using service commands, always re-initialize the system by turning the power
OFF then ON again or by pressing the [INITIALIZATION] key in the DIAGNOSTICS Menu to
ensure the instrument is in the proper configuration for normal operations.

BIOS SETUP PROGRAM - STANDARD CMOS SETUP
Date (mn/date/year) : Mon, Nov 28 1994 Base memory: 640KB

Time (hour/min/sec) : 16 : 40 : 01 Ext. memory: 1280KB
Daylight Saving : Disabled Cyln Head WP lP Sect Size
Hard disk C: type : 47 = User Type 944 14 65535 65535 40 258MB
Hard disk 0: type : Not Installed
Floppy drive A: : 1.44 MB 3.5 n
Floppy drive B: : Not Installed Calendar displayed here
Primary display : EGANGA/PGA
Keyboard : Installed
Options:
Enabled: Daylight saving ON
Disabled: Daylight saving OFF
BIOS SETUP PROGRAM - ADVANCED CMOS SETUP (TYPE 1 BOARD)
Typematic Rate Programming : Disabled : Adaptor ROM Shadow 0800, 32K : Disabled
Typematic Rate Delay (msec) : 500 : Adaptor ROM Shadow EOOO, 32K : Disabled
Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) : 15 : Adaptor ROM Shadow E800, 32K : Disabled
Above 1 MB Memory Test : Enabled : System ROM Shadow FOOO, 64K : Enabled
Memory Test Tick Sound : Enabled : RAS Time Out : Enabled
Memory Parity Error Test : Enabled : 16bit ISA Cycle Insert Wait : 1 W/S
Hit (DEL) Message Display : Enabled : RAS Active Time Insert Wait : Disabled
Hard Disk Type 47 Data Area : 0:300 : Quick RAS Percharge Time : Disabled
Wait For (F1) If Any Error : Enabled ; Slow Refresh : 600 us
System Boot Up Num Lock ; On : 10 Recover Period Define : Enabled
Numeric Processor : Absent : CAS Percharge Time Wait : Disabled
Floppy Drive Seek At Boot : Disabled : Memory Write Insert Wait : Disabled
System Boot Up Sequence : C:, A: : Memory Read Insert Wait : Enabled
Internal Cache Memory : Disabled
Password Checking Option : Disabled
Video ROM Shadow COOO, 32K : Enabled
Adaptor ROM Shadow C800, 32K : Disabled
Adaptor ROM Shadow 0000, 32K : Disabled
Figure 5-3: AMI BIOS

BIOS SeTUP PROGRAM· ADVANCED CMOS SETUP (TYPE 2 BOARD)
Typematic Rate Programming : Disabled : Adaptor ROM Shadow 0800, 32K : Disabled
Typematic Rate Delay (msec) : 500 : Adaptor ROM Shadow EOOO, 32K : Disabled
Typematic Rate (Chars/Sec) : 15 : Adaptor ROM Shadow E800, 32K : Disabled
Above 1 MB Memory Test : Enabled : System ROM Shadow FOOO, 64K : Enabled
Memory Test Tick Sound : Enabled : BootSector Virus Protection : Disabled
Memory Parity Error Test : Enabled : Memory Wait State : Disabled
Hit (DEL) Message Display : Enabled : RAS Time Out : Enabled
Hard Disk Type 47 Data Area : 0:300 : l6bit ISA Cycle Insert Wait : 1 W/S
Wait For {F1} If Any Error : Enabled : RAS Active Time Insert Wait : Disabled
System Boot Up Num Lock : On : Quick RAS Percharge Time : Disabled
Numeric Processor : Absent : Slow Refresh ; 600 us
Floppy Drive Seek At Boot : Disabled : 10 Recover Period Define ; Enabled
System Boot Up Sequence : C:, A: : CAS Percharge Time Wait : Disabled
Internal Cache Memory : Disabled : Memory Write Insert Wait : Disabled
Password Checking Option : Disabled : Memory Read Insert Wait : Enabled
Video ROM Shadow COOO, 32K ; Enabled ; Cyrix KENT Timing : Disabled
Adaptor ROM Shadow C800, 32K : Disabled : Cyrix Shadow BIOS Cacheable : Disabled
Adaptor ROM Shadow 0000, 32K : Disabled : Memory Remap Select : Enabled
Figure 5-3: (continued)
NOTE: Enable Daylight Savings only in the U.S.
Under Advanced CMOS Setup, pressing the F6 key displays the default settings. The settings
displayed in Figure 5-3 above are set at default except for the bolded settings, which have been
changed for the CELL-DYN 1700.
The normal system bootup sequence is drive C:, A:. During instrument service, if it is neces-
sary to boot from the floppy disk, change the bootup sequence to A:, C:. When service is com-
plete, the sequence must be changed back to C:, A:.

DIAGNOSTICS Menu Service Code Function List
When the [SERVICE DEC CODE] key is pressed, the following prompt is shown:
Enter number (currently, 102): _
The number above corresponds to the decimal code for the last code entered.
Table 5-2 lists the decimal-coded (DEC) service commands that can be invoked by pressing the
[SERVICE DEC CODE] key in the DIAGNOSTICS Menu and entering the appropriate number.
Table 5-2: DEC Service Commands

UIC
DEC Function
Codes
07 not used
08 not used
09 not used
11 not used
15 fill lyse into system
16 not used
17 not used
18 not used
19 fill saline & detergent (non-cs)

Table 5-2: DEC Service Commands (Continued)
UIC
DEC Function
Codes ,
20 mini-wash
22 not used
23 prime (cs)
24 fill saline & detergent (cs)
25 daily shutdown (cs)
26 clean for shipping (cs)
33 short sample sensor setup
34 short sample sensor restore
36 clean close sampler (cs)
37 pre-dilute sample run setup
38 pre-dilute sample run exit
39 aperture current off (uses whole blood script)
40 open all valves
41 closed sample run
47 platelet recount
48 initialization (homing)

UIC
DEC Function
Codes
49 open sample run
50 clean orifice (back-flushing)
51 pre-dilute sample run
52 background count run (1)
53 prime system with all reagent
54 daily shutdown (non-cs)
55 empty transducers and cups
56 gain adjust
57 unpinching normally closed valves
59 fill transducers and cups after empty
60 gain adjustment setup
61 dispense 10 ml saline
62 open sample wash
63 clean-for-shipping (non-cs)
64 clean sample syringe setup
65 aspirate 40 JlI sample for 1/250 dilution

---------~----- --------

UIC
DEC Function
Codes
66 dispense 10 ml saline for 1/250 dilution
67 aspirate 100 III sample for 1ISO dilution
68 dispense 5 ml for 1ISO dilution
69 closed sample wash
71 lyse syringe down
72 move probe for blood transfer cup adjustment
73 restore probe after blood transfer cup adjustment
74 lyse syringe up and home
75 lyse syri nge down restore
76 pre-dilute sample wash
77 not used
78 not used
81 enzyme clean the system (cs)
83 diluent syringe down
84 enzyme clean setup
85 probe up and rotate and home

UIC
DEC Function
Codes
86 back to ready position from probe home
87 probe up for probe adjustment
probe down (when finished, operator should ini-
88 tialize the instrument to place the probe in the
home position)
89 sample syringe up and restore
90 sample syringe down and home
91 enzyme clean the system (non-cs)
92 diluent syringe up and home
93 diluent syringe down and restore
117 not used
118 not used
119 not used
120 not used
121 cycle solenoids on waste assy
122 cycle solenoids on flow panel assy
123 sample syringe aspirate

UIC
DEC Function
Codes
124 sample syringe dispense
125 vacuum test
126 check mixing pressure
127 check backflush pump
relieve pressure; stop reagent syringe (2)
V_IDLE - standard flow script end (3)
rotate probe from home to pre-mix cup (3)
prime the system (non-cs) (3)
pri me the system (cs) (3)
clean apertu re (3)
clean transducers and cups (3)
fill reagents into transducers and cups (3)
lyse into system (3)
probe up subscript (3)
probe down subscript (3)
wash probe down (3)

UIC
DEC Function
Codes
aspirate 10 mL diluent (3)
(1) Uses same flow script as open sample run

(2) Not a sub-script, no number assigned
(3) Subscript, no number assigned
NOTE: Certain commands are not sent to the CCM when the system is in an interlock state, such as
STANDBY or UNINITIALIZED.
The following are descriptions of some of the special complex functions:
Probe Check
There are two probe check functions activated by softkeys. One moves the probe up and down with-
out rotational motion, the other homes the probe as in the Initialization procedure.
NOTE: Neither procedure puts the probe in the STANDBY position (on the left). Note also that the Up/
Down Probe Check procedure leaves the probe assembly free to move back and forth. The
cursor now hovers over the appropriate key when the user is carrying out a multiprocess se-
quence (such as Probe Up/Down).
Auto-CyclingjCode 999)
CEll-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 5-43

The CELL-DYN 1700 can be pre-set to do a specified number of RUN cycles without user interven-
tion. This capability applies only to normal RUN Count Test, Pre-Dilute RUN, (PRE-DIL TEST), Gain
Adjust (GAIN ADJ), and Electrical Background (ELEC BKGD). This capability will help reduce test
time for the instrument. The following entry screen will appear after entering code 999:
-- Auto Cycle Test Set Up --
Use n#n key to accept current number
Use "<_" key to delete a digit
Use n*" key to cancel
Enter Number of Times to Repeat Test (currently, 10):1
Auto Cycling ON
5.9 SAMPLE PROBE DESCRIPTION
The motors that enable the Sample Probe to move up/down and to rotate are stepper motors which
are under direct computer control. Since there is no direct positional feedback sent to the computer,
position switches are employed to verify critical positions during normal operation. It is important to
understand that these switches only verify and do not control the movement of the Sample Probe.
In the DIAGNOSTICS Menu, Service DEC Codes 128, 129, and 130 allow the service representative
to control and exercise all stepper motors in the CELL-DYN 1700. This description will focus on the
Probe Up/Down Motor (B/2) and the Probe Rotate Motor (C/3) which control the movement of the
Sample Probe.

The procedures for aligning the Position Switches and aligning the Sample Probe height are
described Section 8. In order to better understand these procedures, read the following descriptions
of the normal operation of the Sample Probe, descriptions of switch failures, and a description of Ser-
vice DEC Codes 128, 129, and 130.
Service DEC Codes 128, 129, and 130 Descriptions

These commands reside in the SERVICE DEC CODE screen of the DIAGNOSTICS Menu and are
used to test, control, and exercise CELL-DYN 1700 stepper motors. A description of each of these
three commands is given below.

This code runs a computer generated test (Motor Power Test) of all stepper motors, motor driver
boards, and associated circuitry.
The Motor Power Test should be run whenever a problem is suspected with any assembly that is
driven by a stepper motor. The test should also be run before performing any Sample Probe align-
ment procedure.

The following entry screen will appear after entering code 128:
Motor Power Test Started.
To MPM: {I }
To MPM: {pD32}
To MPM: {mC1!2 } AC}
To MPM: {C1 }
inp: 0415
A report is automatically displayed and can be printed. An example of the Motor Power Test is shown
in Figure 5-4. When the results of this test are displayed, compare the data shown for the motor being
tested to the specifications shown in Table 5-3, Motor Power Specifications.

Press the [INITIALIZE] key before leaving the DIAGNOSTICS Menu.
CELL-DYN 1700 MOTOR POWER TEST REPORT
Dec 12 1994 08:09

CELL-OYN 1700 Serial # _ Operator
1.0.:
(Software version information is displayed here)
Motor Power Test Results
A/D Offset Nominal: 120 Actual: 129.4 Error: 7.83%
Motor Low Med High Phase

A 2.0 4.3 6.2 6.2 SAMPLE SYRINGE
B 1.8 3.9 5.4 5.5 SAMPLE PROBE
UP/ON
C 2.2 6.5 9.8 9.8 SAMPLE PROBE
ROTATE
0 1.9 4.1 5.8 5.9 DILUENT SYRINGE
E 2.4 6.6 9.9 10.0 DIRECTIONAL
VALVE
F 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
G 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
H 1.7 3.7 5.2 5.2 LYSE SYRINGE
I 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
J 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 NEEDLE (CS)
K 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 SAMPL PUMP (CS)
L 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 OIL PUMP (CS)
Figure 5-4: Motor Power Test

Table 5-3: Motor Power Specifications
MOTOR A,D B,H C,E
NOMINAL LOW 2.0 (+/- .4) 1.7 (+/- .34) 2.3 (+/- .46)
NOMINAL MED. 4.3 (+/- .86) 3.7 (+/- .74) 6.5 (+/- 1.3)
NOMINAL HIGH 6.1 (+/- 1.22) 5.2 (+/- 1.04) 9.8 (+/- 1.96)
NOMINAL PHASE 6.1 (+/- 1.22) 5.2 (+/- 1.04) 9.8 (+/- 1.96)
The tolerances for the values are +/- 20% of the nominal value.

This code allows the "Run" and "Idle" power levels to be set when exercising a stepper motor. The
four levels are:
0) Full Power
1) Medium Power
2) Low Power
3) Off
This code tests mechanical assemblies at various power levels or to remove idle power so the mech-
anism can be more easily moved or checked manually. The following entry screen will appear after
entering code 129 (press the ENTER key after each entry):

-- Testing Motor Power Levels--
Use "#" key to accept current number
Use "<-" key to delete a digit
Use "*" key to cancel
Motor Letters: ABC D E F G H I J K L
Number: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Enter Corresponding Motor Number (1 to 12, currently 1): 1
Enter Running Power (0 - max to 3 - off, currently 1): 1
Enter Idle Power (0 - max to 3 - off, currently 1): 3
After the entries have been made, a message will appear such as:
Motor "A" set to running power of 1 and idle power of 3
This code allows the direction, speed, and number of steps to be set when exercising a stepper motor.
The following entry screen will appear after entering code 130:
-- Motion Check Testing --
Use "#" key to accept current number
Use "<-" key to delete a digit
Use "*" key to cancel
Motor Letters: ABC D E F G H I J K L
Number: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112

Enter Corresponding Motor Number (1 to 12, currently 2): 10
Enter Direction (0 or 1, currently 0):1
Spd Code: ! # $ % &' ( ) * + ,
" / 0 1
Number: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Enter Corresponding Speed Number (1 to 17, currently 6): 6
Enter Number of Steps (1 to 999, currently, 100): 100
After the entries have been made, a message will appear such as:
Motor "B" : motion in direction "0" at speed "&" for 100 steps
Motor Direction Commands
Table 5-4 contains information on the motor designation, command and direction of the motor to be
tested. Table 5-5 lists the motor speed commands to determine the speed of the motor being tested.
Both tables are needed to properly test the motor.
Table 5-4: Motor Direction Commands

Motor
Designations Function Command Direction
0 Down/Aspirate
A/1 Sample Syringe
1 Up/Dispense
0 Up
B/2 Probe Up/Down
1 Down

Table 5-4: Motor Direction Commands (Continued)
Motor
Designations Function Command Direction
CCWlTo RBC cup
0
C/3 Probe Rotation CWlTo Pre-Mixing
1
Cup
0 Down/Aspirate
0/4 Saline Syringe
1 Up/Dispense
0 CCW/Dispense
E/5 Directional Valve
1 CW/Aspirate
F/6 Spare
G/7 Spare
0 Down/Aspirate
H/8 Lyse Syringe
1 Up/Dispense
1/9 Spare
1 Up/Pierce
J/10 Needle
0 DownlWithdraw
1 CW/Backwash
K/11 Sample Pump
0 CCW/Aspirate
1 CW/Draw Air Gap
L/12 Diluent Pump
0 CCW/Aspirate

Table 5-5: Motor Speed Commands
Motor Speed Commands
Speed in Steps
Command
per Second
1 50
2 75
3 283
4 300
5 166
6 200
7 250
8 10
9 151
10 222
11 25
12 182
13 100
Table 5-5: Motor Speed Commands (Continued)
Motor Speed Commands
14 125
15 91
16 67
17 111
Sample Probe Normal Operation

Figure 5-5 illustrates the Sample Probe's up/down sequence during the INITIALIZE and RUN cycles.
Figure 5-6 shows the probe's rotation movement during the INITIALIZE cycle.
Initialization Mode
The Initialization cycle places mechanical and electrical components in the "home" position, drains
any liquid in the tubing, Pre-Mixing Cup, and the Mixing Chamber of the von Behrens RBC Trans-
ducer to the waste system, then places the instrument in the INITIALIZED state.
S.teQper Motor Homing
Homing a stepper motor is the process of setting up the initial position from which all future movement
will be referenced. In the CELL-DYN 1700, this is accomplished by forcing the motor to move against
a physical stop (Hard Stop). When the mechanical assembly, driven by the motor, reaches the Hard
Stop, the stepper motor electrically slips until it is forced to stop.
This mechanical position then becomes the zero reference position for the motor.

Operation:
1. The Sample Probe moves up at a fast speed until the Upper Switch (#2) is activated. It is
then changed to a slow speed, and "homed" against the Upper Hard Stop, which is the
metal plate at the top of the Sample Probe Assembly.
2. The probe moves down six steps and the Upper Switch (#2) is checked.
3. The probe moves CCW at a fast speed until the Right Switch (#4) is activated. It is then
changed to a slow speed, and "homed" against the Right Hard Stop, which is the
mounting bracket for Right Switch (#4).
4. The probe moves CW to the Pre-Mixing Cup and Left Switch (#3) is checked. The probe
then moves into the Pre-Mixing Cup.
5. The probe moves up and Upper Switch (#2) is checked.
6. The probe moves CCW to center and down positions; and the Lower Switch (#1) is
checked.
7. This completes the Initialization cycle.

Run Mode
Figure 5-7 illustrates the probe's movements during the RUN cycle.
Operation:
1. When the Start Switch is pressed, 30 JlL of sample is aspirated and Lower Switch (#1) is
checked.
2. The Sample Probe then moves up to a position six steps from Upper Hard Stop, and
Upper Switch (#2) is checked.
3. The probe moves CW to Pre-Mixing Cup and Left Switch (#3) is checked.
4. The probe moves CCW eight steps and into the Pre-Mixing Cup, where dispense, probe
shake, and aspiration of RBC sample takes place.
5. The probe then moves up to a position six steps from Upper Hard Stop, and Upper Switch
(#2) is checked.

C) (Q
z It)
•
i= It)
o UP
o
:I:
t/)
W
ADJUST
PROBE
-- ~ H.
: HARD STOP
...J "RUN" UP
m HERE-.___ 6
:::) : POSITION It)
0')
~
1
0')
~
l-
e ~
z 9 CU
« :::J
~
t/) .c
-
(J
l-
ADJUST
(1)
u.
---
SW.#2
~
t/)
o ~
: HERE
z (Q
~e N
Q
-.::t
~
0')
817
832 817
-CU
:::J
C
CU
:E
(1)
ADJUST C.)
---
SW.#1 .~
~ . • HERE (1)
tn
Q
Q
15 ......
~
"INITIALIZE" @
&"RUN" Z
It)
, DOWN
>
c
o -- : POSITION C
•
...I
~
(1)
...I
W
Figure 5-5 Probe Up/Down "INITIALIZE" and "RUN" Modes SSOOO29A
tn o
AS PIRATIO N_--7'1"'"--"""
---r HARD STOP
8 STEPS PRE-MIXING CUP RBC

8 STEPS
MIXING
CHAMBER
DISPENSE POSITION ELECTRONIC HOME
117 STEPS
112 STEPS
CENTER POSITION
Figure 5-6 Probe Rotate "INITIALIZE" Mode SS00030A

PRE-MIXING CUP RBC MIXING CHAMBER
HARD STOP
3
ADJUST
SW. #3 HERE DISPENSE POSITION
ADJUST SW. #4 HERE
DISPENSE POSITION
119
112
CENTER POSITION
Figure 5-7 Probe Rotate "RUN" Mode SS00031A

6. The probe moves CCW to the Mixing Chamber of the von Behrens RBC/PLT Transducer,
stops three steps from Right Hard Stop, and Right Switch (#4) is checked.
7. The probe moves into the RBC/PLT Mixing Chamber and RBC sample is dispensed.
8. The probe moves up to a position six steps from Upper Hard Stop, and Upper Switch (#2)
is checked.
9. After completion of the count cycle, the probe moves CW to center position.
10. The probe moves down and Lower Switch (#1) is checked.
11. This completes the RUN cycle.
Switch Failure Descriptions

Example of fault reports are shown in the following figures:
Figure 5.8 Lower Switch (#1) Fault Report
Figure 5.9 Upper Switch (#2) Fault Report
Figure 5.10 Left Switch (#3) Fault Report
Figure 5.11 Right Switch (#4) Fault Report
When a switch is checked by the computer and found to be deactivated (open) in normal operation,
the following message will be displayed on the RUN Menu: "Not Ready: SEE DIAGNOSTICS".
From the MAIN MENU, press [DIAGNOSTICS]. The screen will immediately display one of the Fault
Reports shown in Figures 5-8 through 5-11.

The message <SWITCH: 1 CHECK> indicates that Lower Switch (#1) failed when checked. The
message <* NOT ON ANY SWITCH *> indicates that none of the switches were activated when the
failure occurred. Refer to Figure 5-8.
The message <SWITCH: 2 CHECK> indicates that Upper Switch (#2) failed when checked. The
message <* NOT ON ANY SWITCH *> indicates that none of the switches were activated when the
failure occurred. Refer to Figure 5-9.
The message <SWITCH: 3 CHECK> indicates that Left Switch (#3) failed when checked. The mes-
sage <ON SWITCH(ES): 2 TOP> indicates that Left Switch (#3) was activated when the failure
occurred. Refer to Figure 5-10.
The message <SWITCH: 4 CHECK> indicates that Right Switch (#4) failed when checked. The mes-
sage <ON SWITCH(ES): 2 TOP> indicates Right Switch (#4) was activated when the failure occurred.
Refer to Figure 5-11.
The above conditions do not necessarily indicate that a switch has actually failed. They only indicate
that the switch was not read as activated when checked by the computer. A failure could also be
caused by improper switch alignment, an electronic hardware failure, or a mechanical hardware fail-
ure.

CELL-DYN 1700 Diagnostics Report
CD1700 Serial #: _ Dec 17 1994 11 :38 am

UIS: Version 1,00 Operator 10: 999
Sequence #: 68
Position Fault
Fault data:
00:04 00 OA DC 31 00 00 00 DO 1E 31 FF 00 00 00
00
10:00 00 00 01
Cksum: 19 31 I 22 bytes received
Process number: 49
Step number at time of fault: 4
Process elapsed time: 2780 ms.
Switch: 1 , check
*NOT ON ANY SWITCH *
UIS: Version 1.00 File date code:

CCM ROM Version: 3 CD1700
DOS Version: 5.0
BIOS Version: 07-07-91
Figure 5-8: Lower Switch (#1) Fault Report

C01700 Serial #: _ Dec 17 1994 11 :38 am

UIS: Version 1.00 Operator 10: 999
Sequence # : 68
Position Fault
Fault data:
00:02 00 00 52 35 00 OC E4 ED CD 32 FF 00 00 00
00
10:00 00 00 01
Cksum: 32 EB I 22 bytes received
Process number: 53
Switch: 2 . check
* NOT ON ANY SWITCH *

CCM ROM Version: 3 C01700
MPM ROM Version: Vl.l 05-05-91
DOS Version: 5.0
Figure 5-9: Upper Switch (#2) Fault Report

CELl-DYN 1700 Diagnostics Report
C01700 Serial #: _ Dec 17 1994 11 :38 am

UIS: Version 1.00 Operator ID: 999
Sequence #: 68
Position Fault
Fault data:
00:07 00 19 FO 31 00 02 1C DO 77 33 FO 00 00 00
00
10:00 00 00 01
Cksum: 78 34 I 22 bytes received
Process number: 49
Switch: 3 check
«
On switch(es) 2: top

CCM ROM Version: 3 V C01700
MPM ROM Version: V1.l 05-05-91
DOS Version: 5.0
Figure 5-10: Left Switch (#3) Fault Report

C01700 Serial #: _ Dec 17 1994 11 : 38 am

U18: Version 1.00 Operator 10: 999
Sequence #: 68
Position Fault
Fault data:
00:00 00 7.c 38 30 00 00 00 FO 02 34 FD 00 00 00
00
10:00 00 00 01
Cksum: CD AE I 22 bytes received
Process number: 48
SWitch;A . cbeck
On switch(es) 2: top

CeM ROM Version: 3 C01700
DOS Version: 5.0
Figure 5-11: Right Switch (#4) Fault Report

5.10 CELL-DYN 1700 ERROR MESSAGES
Table 5-6 below lists the most serious error messages on the CELL-DYN 1700 instrument.
Table 5-6: Error Messages

Error Message Description
(Status box)
A CCM process initiated by the user took longer to complete than
Time-out at N
allowed (usually indicating a failure of the CCM). The process ran
seconds
approximately N seconds before the time-out occurred.
Process A count test was stopped either by the user or because of a fault
Aborted detected by the CCM.
Fix then press
[CLEAR A user-correctable fault condition was detected.
ALARM]
Process Moni-
A process was stopped by the user (using the asterisk (*) key.
toring Aborted
Error Message Description of the error.
(Display Area II)
The Printer Output option was ON and the printer did not print the
Printer Time-out requested report in the expected time.

Table 5-6: Error Messages (Continued)
(Status box)
The user has entered a command for the CCM whose numeric value
Code N is
exceeds 127. The value entered was N.
Invalid
Incomplete On a CELL-DYN 1700CS, not enough blood was detected for the
Aspiration last processed sample.
Error Message
Description
(Status box)
Cannot do this The user has attempted to issue a command to the CCM that cannot
Function be executed because of a pending fault condition.
WBC Meniscus
Detection, RBC During the most recent count, a meniscus was not detected or was
Meniscus detected at an unexpected time.
Detection
WBC Count
Time-out (clog),
During the most recent count, a Clog occurred.
RBC Count
Time-out (clog)

(Status box)
CCM Pulse
Height Memory During the most recent count, there was an overflow in one of the
Saturation pulse-height arrays (histograms).
Warning
External Waste
The external waste bottle has been filled.
Full
Lyse Empty,
Detergent
The indicated reagent has run out.
Empty, Diluent
Empty
Invalid Alarm A bit was set in the fault message from the CCM that has no valid
Set interpretation.
After some mechanical motion, a reading of all the position sensors
*NOT ON ANY
indicates that none are activated. (This message does not necessar-
SWITCH*
ily mean that a mechanical fault has occurred.)
Waste Overflow
A reading of the sensor in the Waste Accumulator suggests that
Into Accumula-
there is liquid in the accumulator.
tors
Error Message
Description
(Status box)

(Status box)
There was a vacuum failure during power-up or the instrument is
Vacuum
unable to maintain vacuum level while in the READY state.
Pressure There was a pressure failure during power-up.
A mechanical assembly is not in the correct position for the most
Position Fault
recent function to be performed, as indicated by position sensors.
Sensor Fault -
A Time-Out fault occurred in draining one of the waste bottles. This
Internal Waste
error is also associated with positive pressure.
Empty
Canceling Auto-
This message appears when the user cancels Auto-Count Testing.
Cycling
Invalid UIC
Command Sent The UIC sent a command to the CCM that it cannot interpret.
toCCM
An error in the timing of a flow script has occurred. This occurs dur-
Error in Flow
ing instrument initialization when the flow script takes more than
System Timing
three minutes to complete.
Histogram
The CCM was unable to clear the pulse-height memory.
Memory Clear

(Status box)
CCM Program,
The CCM detected a failure in its RAM.
RAM Memory
Error Message
Description
(Status box)
CCM/MPM
Message Fault
Other error-
related mes-
sages:
An error in CCM/MPM interprocessor communications occurred. A
fault was generated in an attempt to send or receive motor or other
MPM to CCM,
command to or from MPM, or the MPM was unable to perform the
Message Trans-
function.
mit Error
Command to
be Sent to
MPM is Incor-
rect
Error Message
Description
(Status box)

(Status box)
No Such Script
Error in loading a flow script.
in ROM or RAM
CCM/UIC Mes-
An error in UIC/CCM interprocessor communications occurred.
sage Fault
DCM Fault A fault was detected during power-up check of the DCM board.
The CCM is not functioning or the signal cable connecting the CCM
No Response
and UIC is faulty or disconnected. Turn the instrument OFF, check
from CCM.
the CCM/UIC cable, then turn the instrument ON.
CCM is Initializ-
The CCM is in the middle of its Initialization process.
Ing
Undefined
An undefined event or process occurred.
Event
Count Test
The [COUNT TEST] key in the DIAGNOSTICS Menu is used to run specimens and display Count
Check data without returning to the RUN Menu. Coded data relating to specific cycle functions, raw
measurement, and flow count time are displayed for use in troubleshooting or service.
Table 5-7 lists the event messages that are displayed during the Diagnostic Menu Count Test.

Table 5-7: Event Messages During Diagnostic Menu Count Test
Event Messages Description
SampSw. pressed Touch Plate was pressed.
Remove speci-
Specimen should be removed.
men
Count valve open The counting valve is open.
RBC histogram
RBC histogram is available.
avail
WBC upper det WBC upper meniscus detection.
WBC lower det WBC lower meniscus detection.
RBC upper det RBC upper meniscus detection.
RBC lower det RBC lower meniscus detection.
Pit recount strt Platelet recount starts.
CCM initing CCM initializing.
Data invalid Data entered is invalid.
WBC histo avail WBC histogram is available.
Proc complete Process is completed.
Data avail Data is available.
CCM init done CCM initialization is completed.
Canceled Canceled operation.

Operator-Correctable Alarm or Fault Messages
Table 5-8 lists operator-correctable alarm or fault messages.
Table 5-8: Operator-Correctable Alarm or Fault Messages

Operator-Correctable
Alarm or Fault Messages Description
External Waste Full Waste full sensor is activated.
Detergent is low as detected by
Detergent Low reagent sensor in reagent inlet
tube.
Diluent is low as detected by
Diluent Low reagent sensor in reagent inlet
tube.
No lyse is detected by reagent
Lyse Empty
sensor in reagent inlet tube.
Incorrect error or message was
Invalid alarm set
set.
No detergent is detected by
Detergent Empty reagent sensor in reagent inlet
tube.
No diluent is detected by
Diluent Empty reagent sensor in reagent inlet
tube.

Table 5-8: Operator-Correctable Alarm or Fault Messages (Continued)
Operator-Correctable
Alarm or Fault Messages Description
CCM module is currently in the
CCM is initializing
INITIALIZED state.
Summary of Error Messages

Table 5-9 gives a complete listing of error messages available on the CELL-DYN 1700.
Table 5-9: Summary of Error Messages

Error Message (Status box)
DOS Errors
Arithmetic overflow
Bad drive request structure length
Cannot remove current directory
Cannot rename across drives
Collection index out of range
Collection overflow
CRC error in data

Table 5-9: Summary of Error Messages (Continued)
Device read fault
Device write fault
Disk full
Disk is write-protected
Disk read
Disk seek
Division by zero
Drive not ready
File access denied
File not assigned
File not found
File not open
File not open for input
File not open for output
Floating point overflow
Floating point underflow
Hardware failure
Heap overflow

Invalid drive number
Invalid file access code
Invalid file handle
Invalid floating point operation
Invalid function number
Invalid numeric format
Invalid pointer operation
Path not fou nd
Printer out of paper
Range check
Sector not found
Stack overflow
Too many open files
Unknown command
Unknown media type
Unknown unit
General

Demographic entry disabled
No data to print
Stopping
Unable to Load Flowscript
Unable to Save Cal Factors
Unable to Set Volume
System Fault
Not Ready: See DIAGNOSTICS
Uninitialized
Normal Operator-Correctable
Detergent empty
Diluent empty
Lyse empty
Waste full
DLA Faults

<- ? Invalid error code
CCM command echoed does not match
CCM REQ1 high during data send at char
CCM REQ1 is stuck LOW
DLA buffer overflow on receiving char
DLAlCCM error on command
Incorrect checksum on GCM data receive
NAK received from CCM
No response from CCM
Time-out 1 on wait for GGM REQ1
Time-out 2 on message send to CCM
Time-out 3 on message receive from CCM
Date
Battery failure or system date/time not set
Disk I/O
Cannot open CD1700. ini configuration file

Cannot read CD1700. ini configuration file
Cannot write to CD1700. ini configuration file
CD1700. ini configuration file size error
CD1700. ini configuration file version error
Configuration file error
Error when reading CRC values from disk
Memory error when creating CRC tables
Ticket Printer
Data err
Inc. asp.
No Ticket Detected
QC Log
Can not accept specimen
Can not reject specimen
No loading, QC file has to be empty
Purge log failed
Read QC file failed

Data Log
Cannot do if uninitialized
Cannot write Data Log header to disk
Count overrange
Data Log write error
Failed to read from Data Log
Flow err
Initialize
Data Log initialization failed
QC Log initialization failed
Communications
Break interrupt
Comm open error
Comm error
Framing error

Parity error
Re-transmit started
Re-transmit time-out
Receiver overrun
Transmit started
Unable to re-transmit
Printer Driver
Printer Fault
Printer Not Ready
Printer Off-line
Printer Out Of Paper
Printer Time-out
Ticket Printer Not Ready
QC Log I/O
Failure to read from QC Log
Failure to write to QC Log

QC Log size error
QC Log version error, bytes short for creation of QC
Log
Help
Unable to open help file
Reagent Log
Unable to create file
Unable to open file
Data Log Errors

Cannot Access Data Log
CRC Reading Failed
Data Log initialize failed, bytes short for creation of
Data Log
Data Log Print Error
Data Log size error, Call Technical Support

Data Log version error
Data Transmission Error
Not enough memory error
X-B File
Failed to write to Data Log Header
Failed to write to Data Log
No response from CCM
Data Log I/O

Data Log write failure
Write Header failure
Write version error
General Faults
Abnormal time-out / no MPM response
Attempt to send MPM a new command while busy
CCM pulse height memory saturation warning

CCM is in Fault State
CCM is in Unknown State
CCM Program, RAM Memory Fault
CCM real time clock has failed
CCM/DLA Message Communication Fault
Command to be sent to MPM is incorrect
Count Overrange
Count time-out (clog)
Data Capture Fault
DCM Fault
Detected Probe Assembly Switch: # in Incorrect
State
Detergent sensor
Diluent sensor
Error in Flow System Timing
Fault response from MPM
Guard electrode voltage warning
Histogram Memory Clear Failure

Incomplete Aspiration
Incorrect command to be sent to MPM
Initial Communication with DLA Failed
Invalid Command Sent to CCM
Invalid Data
Mechanical Position Fault
MPM to CCM, message transmit error
No response from MPM
Press [INITIALIZATION] key to clear fault and re-ini-
tialize meniscus detector: "True" sensed at metering
start meniscus: not detected during valid time inter-
val
Pressure Level Time-out
Pressure Over-Limit Detected
Printer is not Ready: Cannot RUN uninitialized
RBC Clog
RBC Flow Error
Run time error: # at :

Time out after approximately __ minutes
Turn off instrument and drain accumulators manually
Unexpected response from MPM
Unknown MPM/CCM fault
Vacuum Level Time-out
Waste Drain to Empty Time-out
Waste Overflow into accumulators
WBC Clog
WBC Flow Error
Wrong software for this instrument
Fault Log
Error in writing to Fault Log file
Error in writing header to Fault Log file
Fault Log 1/0

Allocating heap memory error
Bytes short to create the Fault Log

Fault Log file size error
Fault Log Header 10 Error
Incorrect version of Fault Log
Lab ID Setup
Drive A is not ready
Fail to read assay file
Fail to write LAB ID file
Incorrect assay format
Incorrect disk. QC values do not apply to this instru-
ment
Incorrect Exp. Date
Incorrect Lot Number
Incorrect parameter in assay file
5.11 SOFTWARE COMMANDS AND SEQUENCE
CD1700 File and Directory Structure

The current CELL-DYN 1700 directory structure is outlined below:

C:\ (root directory)
COMMAND.COM (currently DOS 5.0)
AUTOEXEC.BAT
CONFIG.SYS
AUTOEXEC.BAK (backup of original file if created by
previous installation)
CONFIG.BAK (backup of original file if created by
previous installation)
DOS (subdirectory)
CD1700 (subdirectory)
CD1700.EXE
CD1700.INI
DATALOG (20.5 MB)
QCLOG (5.5 MB)
FAULTLOG
REAGLOG
ID.DAT
HELP (subdirectory)
HELPxx (xx is numeric)
Accessing DOS
There are two ways to access the DOS program from the CD1700 program: with the CD1700 pro-
gram still loaded or by exiting the CD1700 to DOS. The Exit CD1700 to DOS method is the preferred
method.

CD1700 Program Loaded
1. With the CELL-DYN instrument ON, go to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu.
2. 2. Press ESC on the PC keyboard. A warning message appears on the screen. Heed
the message.
3. Press the Alt and d keys simultaneously. The following DOS prompt appears:
C:\CD1700>.
4. Execute the desired DOS commands. Most commands can be executed. However,
computer memory is limited since the CD1700 program is still loaded.
CD1700 Program Not Loaded
1. With the CELL-DYN instrument ON, go to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu.
2. Press ESC on the PC keyboard. A warning message appears on the screen. Heed the
message.
3. Press the Alt and x keys simultaneously. The CD1700 program is removed from computer
memory. The following DOS prompt appears: C:\>.
4. Execute the desired DOS commands.
Exiting DOS
To exit the DOS Program and return to the CD1700 Program in the case where the CD1700 Program
remains loaded (Alt d was used to access DOS), type exit at the C prompt and press the Enter key.
The DIAGNOSTICS Menu will again be displayed.

To exit the DOS Program in the case where the CD1700 Program is not loaded (Alt x was used to exit
the CD1700 Program), turn the instrument OFF then ON again to reinitialize the system.
NOTE: Turning the instrument OFF then ON again prepares the system for normal operation.
Common DOS Commands

Function Command Description
Change drives c: or a: switch C and A drives
Change directory cd filename
New directory md directory name
Remove directory rd directory name
Compare comp file1 with file2
Copy copy source to destination
Delete del file name(s)
Directory dir current or specified drive
Exit exit quits the current program
Rename ren file1 to file2
Undelete undelete file name
DOS Command Usage

Change Drives
When accessing DOS from the CD 1700 program, the C:\> prompt is displayed, indicating the C drive
is selected. To change to the A drive (floppy disk), type A: and press Enter. The prompt changes to
A:\> indicating the A drive is selected.

Change Directories/Files Within a Drive
To move from a directory to the root directory (C:\) type cd\ and press the Enter key.
To move one level closer to the root directory, type cd.. (where .. are two periods) and press the Enter
key. For example, to move from CD1700\HELP to CD1700 subdirectory, type cd.. and press the
Enter key.
To move one level away from the root directory, type cd_[directory name] (where _ indicates a
space) and press the Enter key. For example, to move from the root directory (c:\) to the CD1700
directory, type cd cd1700 and press the Enter key.
Make a New Directory
To create a new directory or subdirectory, type md (for make directory) followed by a space and the
name of the new directory and press Enter. For example, to create a new directory called Sample,
type md sample and press the Enter key.
NOTE: When creating a subdirectory, make sure you are in the proper directory.
Remove a Directory
To remove a directory, first ensure that there are no files in that directory. All files must be removed or
erased from a directory before that directory can be removed. Type rd_[directory name] (where _
indicates a space) and press the Enter key. For example, to remove an empty directory called
Patient, type rd patient and press the Enter key.
Compare

Use the Compare command to compare the contents of two files. The files can have the same name,
provided they are in different directories or on different drives. To compare two files, type
comp_file1_file2 (where _ indicates a space). For example, to compare the file Sample1 with
Sample2, type
comp sample1 sample2 and press the Enter key.
~
To copy a file on the CELL-DYN 1700 hard drive (C drive) to a floppy disk (on the A drive):
1. Access DOS by following the Exit CD1700 Program procedure above. Change to A drive
if the file to be copied is on A drive.
2. If necessary, use the cd command to access the directory containing the file(s) to be
copied.
3. At the C prompt, type Copy_C:\[filename]_A:\ (where [filename] is the complete file
name and _ indicates a space between characters). Example: to copy file CONFIG.SYS
from the C drive to the A drive, type
copy c:\config.sys a:\ and press the Enter key.
To copy this file from the A drive to the C drive, type
copy a:\config.sys c:\ and press the Enter key.
Delete a File
To delete a file:
1. 1. Access DOS by following the Exit CD1700 Program procedure above. Change to A

drive if the file to be deleted is on A drive.
2. 2. If necessary, use the cd command to access the directory containing the file(s) to be
deleted.
3. 3. At the C prompt, type delete_ [filename] (where [filename] is the complete file name
and _ indicates a space between characters) and press the Enter key. For example, to
delete a file called Sample from the C drive, type delete sample and press the Enter key.
Undelete a File
To undelete a file which had previously been deleted:
1. At the C prompt, type undelete_ [filename] (where [filename] is the complete file name
and _ indicates a space between characters) and press the Enter key. For example, to
undelete a file called Sample from the C drive, type undelete sample and press the Enter
key.
Rename a File
Use the Rename command to change the name of an existing file. To change the name of file, use
the format ren_[filename1]_[filename2] (where _ indicates a space).
For example, to rename the file PATIENT1 to the new name SAMPLE2, type ren patient1 sample2
and press the Enter key.
View Files in a Directory
To view all the files in a particular directory:
1. 1. Access DOS by following the Exit CD1700 Program procedure above. Change to A

-------------------------

drive if the files to be viewed are on A drive.
2. 2. If necessary, use the cd command to access the directory containing the file(s) to be
viewed.
3. 3. At the C prompt, type dir and press the Enter key.
NOTE: If there are many files, the file names will scroll down the screen too rapidly for the user to see.
The user can prevent this by adding a specified "parameter" to the DIR command using the
following format: DIR_[parameter] (where _ indicates a space).
For example, to stop the file names at the end of each page: type dir /p and press the Enter
key.
To display the file names in columns across the width of the page: type dir /w and press the
Enter key.
Software Installation/Upgrades
1. 1. With the CELL-DYN instrument ON, go to the DIAGNOSTICS Menu.
2. 2. Press ESC on the PC keyboard. A warning message appears on the screen. Heed
the message.
3. 3. Press the Alt and x keys simultaneously. The following DOS prompt appears:
C:\CD1700>.
4. 4. Install the software disk in Drive A.
5. 5. For initial software installation only, type A:\ncs for the 1700 model or A:\cs for the

1700CS model, and press the Enter key.
NOTE: The ncs and cs commands will create new files, writing over existing files such as Data Log.
For this reason these commands should not be used to install software upgrades. As of the
publication date of this manual, no separate command existed for installing software upgrades.
Check Technical Service Bulletins for any additional information concerning this procedure.

Section 6
DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
Table of Contents
List of Diagrams and Schematics

Title Part Number
Metering Tube Printed Circuit
Board (200mL) 9630102
Metering Tube Printed Circuit
Board (100mL) 9630105
Chopper Driver Printed Circuit
Board 963042X
Pre-Amplifier Module (PAM) 963045X
Signal Processor Module (SPM) 9630522
Main Amplifier Module (MAM) 9630531
Pressure Regulator Module (PRM) 9630801
Cell Count Module (CCM) 9630810
Motor Processor Module (MPM) 9630920
Solenoid Driver Module (SDM) 9630930
Device Control Module (DCM) 9630940
Cable Distribution Module (CDM) 9630950
Section 6 DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
Title Part Number
Mother Board Module (MBM) 9631291
Data Link Adapter (DLA) 9631540
Power Distribution Module (PDM) 9631560
Keyboard Interconnect 9631580
CELL-DYN 1700CS Flow Diagram 9480081
Wiring Diagram, Cable Connection for
CELL-DYN 1700/1700CS 9510056

Section 6 DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
This section contains diagrams and schematics for the CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS.

Section 6DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
- - 'I
- -.. co
- ICID ........ ~ ..........

lo IILL . . , . . ME DI II-. ,.. .... VoW .,.. _
. . . -.n:Il NCMI ME
illU.
&. . III .,.. . . • _ uar.
-- .
..: 'IN
-=-
5
r-r-~~~.:z.,_L--<:I:C
...
.....
- ~-
--
.- 11II:'
....
IIo'C
Po.
Schematic D.m,
Metming Tube P.C.B~ (200ul)
9630102
2:
'*
:3
I
c.
Q
!
......
1M
..sv
-=
Dill
> .......,....-----t-<;iiBD~
NV571:M
Ii2
lOIC NI1:
C 11& c
150
~
ClRl Rl
IN'il4 lIXI
NIlES ,1,1 NLE:!I:lI: lllHEI!WIlE SPEl::lFlElD.

I. PU.. I:I::II:1l1l11l:11 f\1:l:: IN D1Itll AND ~ 1£..10' T"- =
Il. L. RE:II'IITIlI! Pi'lCICII AI!E: "E- e".
ll. L. Cf\PfIClTIRI8 /lI!E lM I1lCl!llI"f\l!f\DB &DII, ..,.- lllIlr.
RPlC I!PlD
1M IN T""
>....L-r--......-----<;:;u;::O ~
REFERE:N[E lESlGl~jmMS
LMT UIIED IIIIJT UIIED

eSI
lOI! 1:5
CI!+
Dst
.II
IIi!
~ R4 ""
1tP1
TPa
IN~l+
ltIll UI
SChematic Diagram,
Met~l'lgTl,ltle PC,B. (100t!1,,)
963\HO~
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1996 6-5

. :S.:.ec.:. t::.;io:..;.n:..:.6:..:;D:..;.IA:..:.G. :. :. :RA:.. .::.::M:.,:S.. :.A. ::N..::D:.. .=.SC.:. H:.. :.=EM::.;:..:.A. :.TI;.:C:.. :S ---------------1_
-------------
ClI~
uI ...
NOn:lIo CUlLIOSS On.DWISIO SI>I:l::lnlODl.
l. ALL ItE:SISTtRS ARI:: lM OHM' MID ME: V'l.... .....- !Or..
o i!. Au.. CIlPIII:'r'ItRli ARE IN P1lC:ROf"ARflDl> ::IIJIt.J.Pl;.

'litt TAlU..ATmN C:HAIIT.
ililiiliP:16liilui
Ei I
1il1Iii:~ DI:EEE;Na.rEDNS::
~~ NlT UIIEIl
ClI
lua II:;LII:'
UI!:
"'~
TI"1
Schematic Diagram,
COOpper Driver
963(42)(

Section 6DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS _
-----'------..:......:..~~:....--_-------
I·
I
e ICTE& ~ D T ~ .l"e;e"'~
1. !lIEiC 1'. ...1: • ,... VA~
a. IlIU. ~ Q£ lIN ~ V ...'" .;- ""

3- !IoU. CN"M:I'I'1IlU tIlRE IN ",CRCW~ WY• ..,1- lOiI.

_ E+-i+ii)
-
r--_·l'flll~_ _--+ ~
c
--Elo::r----;:=====::::.__
.-
..;"".,,_J
- w
t--.........,--+----, -
("dC)
llff at<; ·IaE>--------
- -
=r--~~----------~~--------....i..--~-GlElJa~_
CELL·DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A·February 1996 6-8

-"S.. :.e. ;,. ct:.. io:..:.n:.. 6:..:.D:..:.IA:.. G.:. .;:",:RA:..::.::.M:.::S.. :.A. .:.N. .:.D:.. .:. SC.:. . ;.H. .:.EM:..::.::.A. .:.TI:.. C:.. S ---j_ -------------
:.l
11
~.,,~~_~.n
·1ckl,~~iSiEtu~k!iID~:~-"1-~~.
_t,h.L~~~#$",
)_.j{,t~,,~~_~w~.G.~',- . . . . R%_
~~:::::1;+_r--.,...-----.,_-o """.
I~~I ---
'H.:·:n'Pt ~
'"
)t
~ ·,w "" ,,~
--
.~
'" ,.
'll
l;
l' Jl J(>
~~
Ll''i1il
'"
.- '"
J-
~)im!
•
A
SahemaOO ift<;lgram,
Signal Pr~ Module (SPM)
963(1522 (Sooet1 of4)
CELL·DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A.February1996 6-9

4
-
I~I
..
"'":
c
-~-
'----+--""'--1 -~
L..-_ _--;;;;""'~.~ =~ ~
'--+-"~'--1
"" !Jb
]>'l'---........-4....:::.-1-
-H'-~
1W.~
K,
a-n Elli!c>---------------+-r---G m:..
n
lK'3
<W:l
, . 11;;'.1
SChematic Dlagrom.
Signal Processor Module (SPM}
L..::============~-----------____ll!!!:::>-!i.H 9630522 (Sheet::! of 4)
CELL-DYN® 1700 service Manual 9140265A-February1996 6-10

'::Jh. ~ IAfLtfl&d
D D
!'lB l<o«l
.--------t--......- -.....-_.;--~K 2lJ;
."" Pi,
AJ'I(
b'"'-----------Gm:::::J !'>If.:!
l- I- .,.- ~>:;.::;-~.
~:;;:::..---I!i!E.,[,=> !mt
1-"'__...::!!:!::... ..!:~2·~··~·· _f]J?fdIT··=> _,
~
r-----------------"·,."'··~'-l--_I!';a. ]uc:> '!i<R
$cl1ematicDiag1am,
Stg:nal P'roCe!llIOl" Module (SF'Ml
963052.2 (Slleet:3 of 4)

~S..:.ec.:..t.:..io:..:.n:...6:..:D:..:.IA:..:G..:..:..:RA:...:::;;M:..:S..:.A..::N..::D:.....::.SC..:..:..:H=EM=.;A:..:.T:..:IC:..:S _
>.2-.....- ....--------------------<:;!!!E:::l 'Wg
5<11 ~
<!<Wt' ~
... <&
"'"
~,. i"11
d.~_
C
>-.!....---.. . . .- ----....---------<:lE:::::J&Ta c
c=::::J ""I
~
iW§
~
-I
'--f------------------------------------------------------<C!!!E:::J""n.
.
:~
'iN':
I :;r
00 1 ,,~ -l:!.-1
-tt:.. c-
'lI: " ~-------<:J'!:CJ i;Ilq
"".,
B 8
I!Hn
001 I!!!C::---------------------------..J!..-1""'"
"'" o--.,...----------'t!:l....I
.----,,,0::,---""'''--; ~
"",",,'
I:EJ r-""""......--"'a'y 01ol',
. - - - - - - - - - - -.....--mc:> jlft2
4J
cv "
<:>
" e;;rt
'0; tt
~ SeJ"lemat\c Diagram,
-;-
Signal Processor Module {SPMl
9630022 (Sheet 4 of 4)
"
.,
_ _1 - - - - - - - - - - -
o o
-_.
4'
~1 + ~
Ull
(Jl1'
1 "Wl'
Uf
la"l lID 1\U',n
\IlQl;.U$. ~
c ,J':lre
l_
t_
~
, a
rmm~O'ffUI,_~
t:4.L~r!:flSit$EN~~A'?E:V4i.'~-~
:UiJJ,eOO101 _ _ "tk
"IU_ _ 'IM",~
0tJm~>!~-R-~roq~-~
Schematic Diagram,
Main Amplifier MOOlile iMAM)
963003)( {Sheet 1 (If 4l

~
1"1l
c c
,
'1 m
JK
~ ttjt(-
!1!l
].~ -'{
~~;'"
ef'1')
~SC:>---6----------------------------_----I
~mc::=>-"",,-------------------------------_----l
Schematic Diagram.
M<rin Amp1iner Mod\.ll~ (MAM}
aSS053X (Sheet 2 of o4}

Section 6D1AGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
_i--------------
Zi'Jro. c
~!f1; Il"1r-.,~--- ......_--~

B
....
St:lWmatie Diagram,
Mail'lAmplifier Module (MAM)
lli63053X (S~ 3Df .)
CELL·DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1996 6-15
..:Se..:.et=io:.:.:n~6:..:D..:.IA..::G:..:RA..:...:.M:.:.:S:..:A:..:N:.:D=-=S..:.C.:.:H=EM::.::..:A~T1C:..:S ~_
_1-------------
o ~
IN
~ fIl'"~>_+------------...J
Schematic Diagram,
Main Amplifier Module {MAM)
963053.)( (Sheet 4 of 4)

_1-------------
..511
al>u;:
10K • v
+ v
R18
EI 1110
DIl.
[lI!N
Mlllieli8
12D
.,,-.. OUT
c llii! c
v
11:1
UI~
:l VOLT
..'"
,RID .",
~
R'I
~ 1 III
11K ~DE_TIDNB
1
1.I~
1IU1 IIIP!IIRiEE>llIllDl:ijnD;JIlI
:100 _8:5' MDT USI!D
e ~~
Ill'
'3 ..... II:!"l.I lK OR'
Ja(
1nIW ~lII:
1l; ""
~ <?J'n liND TI".
1i!PlF" ~I
'I .. UN Tl"'l!I
111':
1 ."
DJllI
>-----;f-"'-[J TO"
1:. ,,1.1. I:ClIITOII: I"'ACKI Al:t T(- l:X;.

lI. AI.l. C","I'IClTOII .1iI1: liD"', ~- 10K.
Schematic OIa{jt3tll,
Pres&Jr. Regu.latof Mooolf} (PRM)
9630&11 (SMet 1 of 1)

~_
.:.S.:.ec::.:t:.:io:.:.n:..:6::D:.:IA:...:G=:..:RA:..:M=.=S..:.A.:.N::D=-S::.C::.H:..::E::.:M:.:A:...:T.:..:I:..:C:..:S:..-
_1-------------
illllfliall
a
ll'oF
i
m .,
"~
~~ 'S'"
.~~~~
liU_ _ "'om;"""",(%
~Oiagmm,
ce~ COUt1l Mo~ (CCMl
9630610 (stleet 1 of 4)
CELL·DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A.February 1996 6-18

section 6DIAGRAMSAND SCHEMATICS
----'--'---...:...:...:..----'-----~---:...;...------
- ..... ---"'"
- ....._---+
_ _
it
t(}
.~ .-- .:':I";i:;e-i5i:./'_ _ mr4M

_ .
o
D u
...
.......=: ..'"
mr--;:;;;-- . .I ~ ,.i!!..-- 11
~
.." _!liM ,...-f- ~ ~ ..
Zl
~ OJ "0
·".,m
. '.
l'i"
~
r(,3
~-
"filii tl
1ft
M
....
7Cl
c
4 ~
- ~
!'C
mH!- :=::
t-1--------------U~===I:::t=~==~ ....
-
,.., ;i!;j 1>'1
~
-" $rirac::-'.-=t:j::"~"''''~'=lI=1===:= ~
-:ftl 1'1< ~ ..- ~
$rir'f~1
j(
'(\ $rir~.Gj- :Nt $HTlJ¥'l!
t:l!I
,
I p~
~
I '" iN.)
w:; 1!1Jl1l
L Wl)
0\
~ +-l- •
ttn
--L- i:.lt, l.:x.;:
+-J 1 ~
l:t;
.. ,..JL
f..-L
0!-
01
m
I:tl
~
QO ~ ,:
9~
~:
M'!'
~"J-L......!....c'=
,""'' + "" um M
~ 'AijD:
....._--I-J.--1-1-::::.:"==~j"q:
-_ ~
L----------+----tll--ir--------------'~"".'"--. $rir~.04
{ 'i
-
Scllemaoo D-lagram,
CeM COl1Ot Module- {CCM)
9630810 (Sheet 2 of 4)
CELL-DYN® 1700 service Manual 9140265A-February 1996 6-19

_ _f - - - - - - - - - - -
H rn
IX'
()\ m
tt
(~
DO
()!.
'"
11
,00
(~
'"
52..:*
9fl'-:i:fl.'t m
",-
i«:: ro
~-
!:!i
[1-
m
III
!lIi 11
116
00
l)r .. '"
1#.
_ woe f
_'" 11
1 ,U1Ji!'
lril",...., -....!-~-L--+- +---J

"#>.1>4 _-,"""'",
..... + __--' ."""""".
!;rr.x.. _-'~'__ _II_------J
"""""iI:l::..
"!'1!RP'4_....!!:i +--------l
Se~c Diagram,
Cell Count Module fCCM)
9630810 {Sheet 3 of 4)
----------------.1_
. :.S. :. ec;;..:t;;..:io. :. n. . ;6..:.D. :.IA. :. G. :.RA..:. .:.M. :. S;;..:A..:.N. :.D:.. . .:.S. :.C. :.H. :.EM..:. A;;..:T..:. I. :.C. :.S_ _
_1----------
....
~ :::.
r~-:: ----l
=:::::j:======:;t:=:::=:::::-~-=---
... ....... .... 1...... I
l :. : : ....... .......... --
....
&hemaue Diagram,
CeH Count Mmfwe (CCM~
9630810 (Shut 4 of 4)
..:Se..:.c.:..t.:..io..:n:--6:..:D..:IA:..:G.::.:..:RA::..::.:;M..:S..:.A..:N.:..:D:--S.:..C.:..H..:E.:..M.:...:..A..:..TI:..:C..:S ---j_ _1-------------
...--....-----1I------tl-ol!> '!N
-
-~ r """'ZU!:ID
E <.::ll>
t
• 1----11-----11----........- -
!i ,
2
; ?1
1..........- ..... .,\.-_0_.""

iCr<'f€. ~,
aID +i~~ tl\I -~i#l{
.~
M
"". 1'i
14M"
.
~
....;\Vl
"'" .
lJI' ?,!l,~ -M
'4
\4
~:
•
I B
'"
t~ 1
1.""'"
SCMmaOO Diagram.
Motot P'tor::e$$Q( MOOu~ (MPM)
9630920 {Sheet 1 of 4}

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1_ _f---------------
, UZl'
I
m <!l
'l)i Cl
11? ~
L":f ~:til
:l<i O!<
""
:ff <I'
Ol}
Di fJf
00
-['..1
m
~E600I·E···;vl""~~
- ~
"
~
-U,
u.n
:>l
fri
!l;l
t\}
-r,if
Ql
Of
~
tJ:)
0'1
OO\! !lIi
iliI
0"1
Q&
""'
~1r
'"
Ii
-
0CIl
I
~
..,,'"
@
C
\1J
¥1
\'\l
i.
}
..""
W'A'
§
'f.I
.,...
:fi
&l1'10<0 Qt W
~$ .•"l dl.\ Wi
;l'l';\"" ••
j\t~r:_
yr
Schematic Diagram,
Mutot Pfoe<l'l~ Mooole (MPI\Il)
9630920 (Sheet 2' of 4)

_S_ec_t_io_n_6_D_IA_G_RAM
__ S_A_N_D_S_C_H_E_M_A_T_I_C_S ----< -----------------------
,..- 7'!l ' - - &IT.}).;
--------'-"
,..- .....l"l1._ _ jHl.(t>I
.-------------------------------------------,jj--;;;;;.=!!$iiij;.,-- :OOi.ll'l
[TI
o
&1!-4.
l}t 'M"''''''. D
f-+-ii--1 "" ttl
~'_JU:i!::=:m:====tt
~ 1iII:l
'~ fU
rll LEL:::>--1Jr~"
Lt-+,,"*-1 Y<t ;m
-~ ~ ", ~,w
t--:':'--1l!104 l'4 "W
10
N
c c
'i------------------+--------------+--------------""="'-------------------""--- 51'.<.1);1
,-------1--'"-----------------+--------------+----------------------------------""--- 004.";
j::I"-------"-"'..-.- - OO~M
,---------+--------------------"'~=.="-.--
""Hl:'"
r---rt =!=:!:!=! '"4A .."

~tl__--1I_------------------"i:M'c"'·"'ill"';"'i:.\"'Tll""''- ,",,2M
'"
: tt
~V--r--r-r-t-~.lIil
I+- +--I--1---l ~ 21 SIf;;.""
L----------t-it;t:"---t~~~· _#:;:.J "'-------------------------"'.,.,."'.. - -- ",or"'."",
lJliL-+ +_-++- ~ -'"IliiliZlw:._ _ ",If"".""
Schematic Diagram.
Motot PrO(iiWl;O( Modulia (MPM)
9530~{) (Sheet 3 of 4)

section 6DIAGRAMS AND SCHEMATICS
IHnc.l
a-rri<!:<j
n_
00il L.lJ'!.'l
-
'---
,",,' "l.L~-~
3"" .l....lF=====~==~w~~~.~~,rl'~.~~=!+==t~~f~~£~~~~~~~E~~~ll----"£~'
.
- S\ a-rr.......
c
-=~"-------------t+-----------t-------+t+----"""''''''''''''--'----'
AU ""
L!<
- '"
""""""" m 'U til
~
iW <It "" «J
;r.t
00
O!
~% 41 1)
..,
.
j 1':1
A \oj Jo} «:; 00
a ¥"i
;(J
OJ
....OJ
ffi
M
""...
{;
1-
" "" .., "
~
'f'! /'ii. If)
M til
.rIt~I~. .....,
"., !(!
'rli Jii. /P G'
~I:,JO )::
'!tI Jlt.
it :tJ
ill m<
~ :n Ni ,."
'''''' .."
..11
"ill! """""'ID
**t
'tl1r
lI!r 4!N oaT- iii!
'\'1lr
.. , ,"'" ''II '" 'M<2'

b '"
A
SdlemiMic Diagtam,
"'" Mo1(ll' ProoeUtlr MGdo!e (MPM)
9630020 (Sheet 4 of 4)
_S_ec_t_io_n_6_D_IA_G_RA_M_S_A_N_D_S_C_H_E_M_A_T_I_C_S -----------------------
~;I._m_ilf€'~
1Zl!!~:::::>------+--- .......,..---t>~.
j 1<l._'<'E""_I<\lD,iilEj.,,~%
.;!1<l._0ll_""'lE¥·zj;,
lAU~_':<!I,"'·>:l%
Schematic Diagram.
Sol>eoold Ott"'i'If ModlJ~e {SOM}
ge30~ao (Sboo:l 1 of 2)

..::S..:.ec.:..;t.:..;io:.:.n:.:.6:..:D:..:IA:..:G.:..:..:RAM~..::S...:.A..:.:.N.::..::D:.:.S.:..C.:..H:.:.E=M.:..;A:.:...:.TI:..:C:..:S ~_
_1-------------
l..t.'lWl
.----.£Io=----...:...~v_:'--"_Ilill< '":>-o!:"'___ _--: ""'"""<.l"r....
" -~
wml!
...._-++-t+"-..."'''';'''''--tl-_-··~·......-; "'" '>-'WiO;.....!l;--.l'u./V......--P :w
-. 10'. ..
.~
.O'l/
i'!1O:' ~-
-
~
"" 'I<
~
:t3': jWJ
'I<
>J'
- -
a;;
<;W
m 001
1'1' t
p
X1_.1'
ftI'l'e
..:
_:
-
(;!II)
,R;
~ 1fltJ tll( 1fltJ

J!h.~ ><.
.iZ\i
-
=
-
!'1:1
lJ'!Il
~~
M ,...
$
(lj .~ >
2
!\t1.~
rr.
12K 1fltJ
1J'"Z'
--
l1!I tilt
2:»<
A
Sehematlc Diagram,
SQlenoid OrJ'ffer MOO~le (8DM)
9630930 (Sheet 2 of 2)
_Se_c_t_io_n_6;....D_IA_G_RA_M_S_A_N_D_S.:,.C_H_E_M_A
__TI;....C....:S_ _- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - I-~----------------------
~ ~t~~~~"mm,-w#~a~: c
~fI!i:_l,~~A'tt#l"*,
!.,>
tt
-W';
Sc~!M;; Diagram,
DeY~ Control Mooule (OCM)
9630940 {Sheet 1 of 3)

o un
m n~
e!
m
'"9!
II!
"" Il<
iii
I'
t-----------~
·---~rr,
SChematic Diagram,
Dellioo Control Module (OeM)
0030940 (Stleet 2 of 3)

..:se..:.:..ct~io~n.:...6~D~IA:...:G.=.:.;RA:...::::M:..:S..:A..::N.:.:D:....::.SC..:.H:...:.=EM:=:...:A..:.TI:...:C:..:S:....- _
_1-------------
"
..................1--......._ -......_ - . . . -...
-.M/
! ~~I:==:I:==:::t================~============:::l'''''i:::=~'-=---':lE3
"""""".
~ I'F f...ll"-+-""'""Ir---......----"'----------J
I) I,
~~ &
00\ .YI fr
L..-_~-<,,/ I.
-~
~t
ll1!:
~
Schematic Diagram,
-.;j:r Device Control Module (OCM)
-
~ 9630940 (Sheet 3 of 3)
CELL-DYN® 1700 service Manual 9140265A-February1996 6·30

-=S.:..ect:..::.:io~n..:6-=D.::.IA~G::RA=M~S:...:A:...::N:...::D=-=S.:..C::HE=M::.:A:..:T~I-=C-=S -------------1 ----------------------
";J1llll;~t;"'_~
!: ~t~w~.., ..AV~tJ~:'fMJ4!:ffc
Pi
,
"* 6-_ _--"------4
,f Vi 1"
•-1 1;
:!l
~
!O
.l!l I:)
:J" U
U
Schematic Diagram,
Cable Dtstribtllion Module {COM}
9630'950 (Simet 1 or 3)

_Se_ct_io,-n_6,-D_IA,-G..:.-..:RA~M:..=S...;:.A~N~D,--,-SC-,--H~EM,-,-A,-T,-IC,-S _
_1-------------
D q),/ -
~~a"':~t'
. . ~____1~-.:....._1
1.."",
L....L...r.:
8
lila<
Ii
III r---~It"
..-1-,,:4'-1_
~
-----q),/.. .- ---'
!JNIii.::
......
Schematic Diagram.
Cable Di'&trlbutlon }.1(ltjlile (COM)
9l)30950 (Sheet 2 ot3}
CELL·Dn~® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A·February 1996 6-32

-~--------
I 1
."
!AA
W:
Tn
1'<2
ij. ....
ro
I---ir-- ""
1M
~i
".;
1M
1r'
:m
'" ".,.
~
m
m
:~
~ "t<",
-.;.
,......
;;oJ;;
Sch&matic Oiaglltm
Cable DisttibtrtJon Module (COM)
~30950 (Sheet 3 of 3)
CELL-DVN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1996 6-33

Section 6DIAGRAMSAND SCHEMATICS _
~~~=""'::":"':~----------1 , "----------
-
-~
D - .""
_"!IV
•.ll¢;l>W
~~4
l'k;iWlif(;,
l~:S'f;.J"
c c
.S>,i
""":1"
~~
-Jt"A"
cO
118M2
B """~llC
_000.
~l1H)
AA.X-
CB.t~jnu)1!)tr
09\il1
tlllhm
D9\il1
SChematic Diagram,
~,,~'
, :~~~:j~---L------.JL
:<
.$
J Malher Board (MeM)
0031291 (sneet '1 of 1)
~~~~~UJ-l\

I I I
.NOTEffi L"NlESS C'THERJ..J:E5E:SPSGI~lEd;

t, ~4 '::i+'~JtM \ii-:'Ll.£S· ME:<MICR~ <Lf' j .
2. ~L A[SI5TC95 ~iNQfi~
(F)I!-lL (~:::::'-WI:REOI lSlEr4.LrfOl"l'lR!:;S.
-
c
Schematic Diagram,
Data Un!< Adaptor (D1.A)
9631540 (Sheet 1 of 3)
I T I

..:s..:ec~t::io::n=6::D::IA:G=RAM=:S:A:N:D=SC:H~EM=A:TI:C:S::::::::::::::::;:===========_
..
D PI UU!
IiIi
q
...
lOt
PI
!'liO""
tot "II!
lit, ,t1IIdJ
.J.L--....,...=:Jt;AL ~
"'l -
"L~ 3l'lI
~~
..·eP
"L~
~t-~
.......
'"'~
~
~
~
"l~
.,~
"l~ I
~~. I! II
,.... ---
-
UUI
Sd\emaoo~,
DE Um< Ad.creDLA}
96315«1 (S~ 2: 01· 3)
CELL·DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A.February 1996 6·36

~Se..:..c.:..ti..:..·o:..:.n:....6:.:D:.:IA:..:.G.:..:..:RA:...:=M~S~A..::.N.:.:D:....S.:..C.:..H:..:.E=M.:..A:..:....TI:.:C..::S ---------------i ~----------------------
2
--..llII\\III&.u.,.JI
Ia '"
;,
~3'
J.;jeJ1 0* au ....1I'l
0' ."II'.N
,..----,
1.11 . ..
.t
!I:
,R
-R'
Oil mllitli Ill ....
1It
''11 R
Seh«I\* O~,
Data Unk Adaptor (DUll
9631540 (Sheet:3 of3)

.::Se.::.ct=io:.:.n:..:6::D:,:IA:.:.G::.RA:.=.:M=S..:.A.;:N.:.:D:..S::.C.::.H:.:.E::.M::.A:..:T.:.,:I::C.::S:....- --1_
~"'~---~
_f-------------
-':[~=
IIJ
I,
~Dtagtam.
Powet {l i$1rltltnb"l Module
9631560 (Sheet 1 cf1)

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1_
.~
t,1i
; ;, .1: lib I ti If 11.1_ Iill .~ II
...
Schlimatic~,
~
1 Of 1)
CELL-Dn~@ 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1996

~
. S1
o
~lva<r .~~~~.
~."FE!'i~' ~1.-~
(f}-tj
ittC
r----"'..;;. -n--fQ \---n-
f<>WW..;;.:.;::,." L.J~I-I-~,......-n----1"l------'''''::
.. ·vr:::':::;"""~_.J '-roo-
_.AI<
.......l----+--------{A
.....
...JI---CI O€!EWJI!!Il
(] .:!.
L------J.-1-----I---------r;;
1:;;tr---clin.-r
t ~
M
I II ...--+------o---~,,..tlrE
c
~9~19 h !J ..
c
~ r$~~ ~,'I:~:
S'!Ef'!'5!li_~la_
---;;. ,~---~~-----l
us- 0ElE~ I
!
]
I
_......Q
i¥;
~
_."I.l>I!' -~
L R~i~
oo.,€w,
I I
u I u::t~
_lIJ\£
P.:.I$-
Mi"e. ~~~.~!P~.
[jJ """","", fl!i<wm".)d"llW~
A
-QI<~"II}.E1
Flow Diagram.
2. ~'_FQ<;~ ~llEa;o;!I'r;I'l'<\'i1l_
a ~ _ _ !lll!I!ilOt. ~!lEwm:!I<r:'I'l'<\'i1l_ CELL,DYN HOOleS
• ,iIl.H~'l&CiO ~JlO!~
94000111 (Shoot 1 of 1)
CELL·DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1996 6-40

---------------1_
..:S:,:e.::.ct::.:io:.:n.:...6:.:D:.:IA:..:.=G.:.:RA:.:::M:,:S:.:A..::N:.:.:D:..=S.::.C.:.:H.::E::.:M::.;A:.:.T.:.:IC:..:S=--_ _
_f--------------
-~~-
[)
{~
-~
Ji:~"-
-----'-"'
. =.. - ---__1f_+-+------+_----___1 J1
-----'-~~:::::.----__1f_+-+------+_----___1 J!
~.l1\!IP~·~
t !ni!!~\IIU_,.,fv.lili
"0 _J'I,_
I I
1-
I M'id!!i!
1'1---.,
"'~
........
c I~ I-
I
I c
I
-
~
~ -
~\It~
...~ . ~
i>~
"""'~-" - I I -y:;;.
~
iXl\I..aillKl$
<:WlltMlll
----------.!!!-!!l<.~--IJl
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _z-=:··::·:..·_-I$'
L-...;:-='="'='---i
:::;.:::;
L_---:-~·· .•._ ___1.»
,f;
~!
.rr Jl
,B -
-$1"0::
~.
I-I lI;1_
ill
i'!!J9!lp,
!itm.¥
.-
I I
L...!-:i!i!:i!i.1_ _t'"J',.
Wiring Oiagr.am,
Cable Connection. COfiOOICS
951005& (Sheet 1<>U)
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-Feb~ary1996 6-41

-=S..:.ec..:.t..:.io:..:.n:..;6:..:D:..:IA:..:.G..:.:..:RA:....::.:::M-=S..:A.:.:N.:.:D=-S..:.C.:..H:..:.E=M:::A:..:..:..TI:..:.C:..:S~_----------------I ~----------------------
_.
_,m!
D Jl J!
--
m.". D
-~
-
~J
.'Ii}
,,<:tl.I--='::"",:,,;-'_+-1 Jl (fll'.oE!tf($
Jl
;(~
I-'lli=ffill"":::"'__-I Jl>
11 ~tw 41 £'
I-Wl =,,,,1"'-,,,_ _--I m
JT I---":....--r
1-\lll:'.:..:,,,,tl'J:.'- ---1.lM m ,iii>
n ",1?:._----I &P
I-s.l=:'",U ~I--=::;....-r
Ji! "
J> I----'~---r
c
- -'
"::,-,''-,'----I.i,~
'1--::'
-,\Xli<
Jt
". 1--:::::--[
11--=·=::-'_--1 ;$
",1--"""='---1
11--=='----1,,'4
,....--.:-::': :""".:'---1;,*
Jl}
liZ
)l;\
J'i
,Jj
¥
$I
JS
J<
$
- ·~z
:Ii)
,16
P 1--:::::--1
,lie
~I-""":;=---{
If!
,J1
!iii "1---==-/
...
...
J!ll-":':o::...~
L ":-=:::::""__ ~,tffij;
L... .....5-!i2!ii:. ~""',tffij,
1....:-=::::__ 'WiN!t, L --=~='

:::,::'~:... __ ~~'~-M
L..._ _':-:!,,:=:,:""_ ~i1!!'ltT' L... ...::-!2,
:f:'2:'::"- - - "PIHr';liI1fli
.Il,
-
"~<a.'(~
,+-----------..:-:::'
: :,: "":. .'- - ~"';@flji
Wirifli3 Oi3l!fam,
Cable COMe~oo" Cl:H 700/cS
9510056 (SMeI 2 0(2)

Section 7
Removal and Replacement
Table of Contents
7.1 INTRODUCTION
7.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Decontamination
Decontamination Procedures
Printed Circuit Board Handling
7.3 SERVICE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
7.4 DISASSEMBLY/REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Model 1700CS Upper Front Cover Removal
Model 1700 Upper Front Cover Removal
Model 1700CS Lower Front Cover Removal
Model 1700 Lower Front Cover Removal
Top Cover Removal
Bezel Removal
Right Cover Removal
Left Cover Removal
RBC and WBC Aperture Plate Removal
von Behrens WBC and RBC/PLT Transducer Removal
WBC and RBC Metering Board Removal
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 TOC-1

Section 7 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
Hemoglobin Flow Cell Removal
Sample Probe Driver Assembly Removal
PAM (Pre-Amplifier Module) Removal
Diluent Syringe Driver Assembly Removal
Diluent Syringe Removal
Sample Syringe Driver Assembly Removal
Sample Syringe Removal
Lyse Syringe Driver Assembly Removal
Lyse Syringe Removal
Fluid Power Supply Removal
MPM (Motor Processor Module) Board Removal
COM (Cable Distribution Module) Board Removal
CRT Assembly Removal
CPU Assembly Removal
PC Power Supply Removal
I/O Boards Removal -- DLA; SVGA, Ticket Printer, and Graphics
Printer/Disk Controller
CPU Motherboard Removal
Disk Drive Assembly Removal
Main (Linear) Power Supply Removal
Cage Mounted Plinted Circuit Boards Removal
Switching Power Supply Removal
Needle Drive Assembly Removal -- Closed Sample Module
Chopper Driver Board Removal -- Closed Sample Module
Sample and Diluent Pumps Removal -- Closed Sample Module
Fan Air Filter Removal
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 TOC-2
CELL-DYN<B> 1700 Service Manual 9140265A - February 1995
7 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Consider all

specimens and reagents, controls, calibrators, etc.
that contain human blood or serum as potentially
7.1 INTRODUCTION infectious. Use established, safe laboratory working
procedures when handling these samples. Wear
This section describes subassembly removal and replacement proce- gloves, lab coats, and safety glasses, and follow other
dures for all field-replaceable system components, and safety precau- biosafety practices as specified in the OSHA Blood
tions to be taken dUring servicing procedures. It also includes a list of borne Pathogen Rule (29 CFR part 1910, 1030) or
required service equipment. other equivalent biosafety procedures.
7.2 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section contains warnings and cautions that must be followed for
your protection and to avoid damage to the equipment.
WARNING: Some of the service procedures described in this sec-

tion must be performed with protective covers removed. These pro-
cedures should be perfonned only by service-trained personnel
who are aware of the hazards involved (for example, fire, explo-
sion, electric shock, and biohazard). Most service procedures can
be performed without power applied to the system. Disconnect
power at the wall outlet before servicing.
Before any repair is completed, make sure that all safety features are
intact and functioning and that all grounded parts are connected to
their proper grounding terminals.
The CELL-DYN 1700 instrument, in common with all medicallabora-
tory instrumentation, can be exposed to biohazardous material during
normal use. Correct laboratory procedures should be followed and pre-
cautions taken to reduce the potential for contamination. To reduce the
risk of biohazard exposure, perform the following decontamination pro-
cedure prior to servicing the instrument.
7 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 7-1

Decontamination Decontamination Procedures

For your own safety, you must decontaminate all surfaces that you To decontaminate surfaces, follow the steps below:
may come in contact with during servicing. An effective decontamina-
tion solution and the recommended procedure is described in section 1. Ensure that all power is off.
Decontamination Procedures below. 2. Prepare a 1% sodium hypochlorite solution by mixing 1 part
bleach to 4 parts water.
WARNING: Assume that all components may be contaminated.
Do not eat, drink, or smoke in the area. Do not reduce the decon- 3. Dampen a clean cloth with the solution and wipe all exterior
tamination time. Do not touch your mouth, eyes, or face after con- surfaces and all assemblies which may be contacted.
tact with the instrument. Wear gloves and safety glasses. Wear a 4. Dispose of the cloth as contaminated material. Wait 30 min-
lab coat to avoid contact with the bleach solution. Wash hands be- utes for decontamination to be fUlly effective before servicing.
fore and after each service call.
Chemical Hazards
IMPORTANTI Before you operate, service or perform maintenance on
any equipment, be sure to read and understand all the information con-
tained in the current Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Always wear proper personal protective equipment and follow correct
work procedures as specified in the OSHA Hazard Communication
Standard (29 CFR 1910.1200).
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A - February 1995

CELL-DYN<B> 1700 Service Manual 9140265A - February 1995
Printed Circuit Board Handling

ReqUired Tool Recommended Model Description
Prevent electrical shock to yourself or damage to the instrument by dis-
connecting electrical power before removing any assembly or printed Screwdriver Phillips No. 2 18-inch
circuit board. Use appropriate PRECAUTIONS whenever servicing the Screwdriver Phillips No. 1 Stubby
instrument while power is on.
Screwdriver Phillips No. 2 Stubby
Many of the Printed Circuit Board-mounted components are extremely Screwdriver Slotted 3/16 X 10 8-inch
susceptible to static discharge. Make sure that you discharge any
Screwdriver Slotted 3/16 X 8 8-inch
static build-Up by touching the chassis before handling any system
Printed Circuit Board. Screwdriver Allen 7/640 8-inch
Nut driver 1/4 " 8-inch
..0... ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING
Nut driver 112" 8-inch
~ ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES.
Pliers 5- Diagonal Cut
Pliers 8- Long Nose
Knife X-Acto Utility
7.3 SERVICE EQUIPMENT REQUIRED
Aashlight Maglight Pen light
Every system subassembly and module can be removed and replaced Spare tubing Silicone ~rious lengths
using the tools listed in Table 7-1. Substitute equipment having the Cable lies Nylon Self-locking
same characteristics as those listed can also be used. Whenever possi-
ble, choose non-magnetic tools to avoid damaging sensitive Printed Table 7-1 Required Service Equipment
Circuit Board-mounted components and magnetic media.
7.4 DISASSEMBLYIREPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Step-by-step subassembly removal procedures for field-replaceable

system components are described in the follOWing pages. Pictures
have been included to help identify the component and the correct
method of disassembly. .
Most subassemblies are replaced in the reverse order of disassembly,
and in most cases reassembly is obvious and straightforward. In those
few cases where different procedures are called for during reassembly,
they are described as part of the overall disassembly procedure.

MOdel 1700CS Upper Front Cover Removal 3. Remove the upper front cover by pulling it up about 1J4-inch
To remove: and out. (See Figure 7-2).
1. Loosen the thumbscrew holding the Closed Sample Assembly
to the front of the instrument. (See Figure 7-1).
Figure 7-2
4. Disconnect the ground wire. (See Figure 7-3).
Figure 7-1
2. Swivel the Closed Sample Assembly out until it is clear of the
covers.
Figure 7-3

Model 1700 Upper Front Cover Removal Model 1700CS Lower Front Cover Removal
To remove: To remove:
1. Remove the upper front cover by pUlling it up about 1J4-inch 1. Remove the upper front cover (page 7- 4).
and OUt. (Refer to Step 3 of the Model 1700CS Upper Front
Cover Removal procedure on page 7-4.) CAUTION: Be sure the Sample Probe is out of the way before at-
2. Disconnect the ground wire. (Refer to Step 4 of the Model tempting to remove the lower front cover to prevent damage to the
probe.
1700CS Upper Front Cover Removal procedure on page 7-4.)
2. If the instrument is ON, from the MAIN MENU press [SPECIAL

PROTOCOLS] then [MORE] followed by [PROBE HOME] to
place the probe over the RBC/PLT Mixing Chamber. If the in-
strument is OFF, make sure the Sample Probe is raised all the
way (if not, turn the lead screw to raise the probe) so that is
clears the lower front panel.
3. Remove the thumbscrew from the lower front cover.
(See Figure 7-4).
Figure 7-4

4. Slide the lower front cover to the left approximately 1f4-inch until it Model 1700 Lower Front Cover Removal
clears the bezel, then lift up and out. (See Figure 7-5).
To remove:
1. Remove the upper front cover (page 7-5).
CAUTION: Be sure the Sample Probe is out of the way before at-
tempting to remove the lower front cover to prevent damage to the
probe.
2. If the instrument is ON, from the MAIN MENU press [SPECIAL

PROTOCOLS] then [MORE] followed by [PROBE HOME] to
place the probe over the RBC/PLT Mixing Chamber. If the in-
strument is OFF, make sure the Sample Probe is raised all the
way (if not, turn the lead screw to raise the probe) so that it
clears the lower front panel.
3. Unscrew the thumbscrew holding the lower front cover to the
chassis. (See Figure 7-6).
Figure 7·5
Figure 7-6
4. Slide the lower front cover to the left approximately 1/4-inch un-
til it clears the bezel, then lift up and out.
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A- February 1995

Top Cover Removal 2. Lift and remove the top cover by sliding it to the rear.
To remove: (See Figure 7-8).
1. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting

screws on the rear of the instrument holding the top cover to
the chassis. (See Figure 7-7).
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-7

Bezel Removal 4. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the outside bezel re-
taining screw. (See Figure 7-10).
A. CAUTION: Before starting this procedure, make sure
~ power to the instrument is turned OFF.
To remove:
1. Remove the upper front cover (page 7-5 for Model 1700 or
page 7-4 for Model 1700CS) and lower front cover (page 7-6
for Model 1700 or 7-5 for Model 1700CS)
2. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the inside bezel re-
taining screw. (See Figure 7-9).
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-9
3. Remove the frame cover on the lower right side of the instru-
ment (refer to Step 8 of the Main Power Supply Removal Pro-
cedure on page 7-53).

5. Remove the bezel by lifting it up and off. (See Figure 7-11). 7. Remove the cable connector connecting instrument to front
panel. If necessary, cut cable tie holding cable. (See Fig. 7-13).
Figure 7-11
6. Remove the ground wire. (See Figure 7-12).
Figure 7-13
Figure 7-12

Right Cover Removal 2. Slide the right side cover to the rear of the instrument about
To remove: 1f2-inch to clear the bezel hanger nuts and lift off.
(See Figure 7-15).
1. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the upper and lower
retaining screws holding the right side cover to the instrument
frame. (See Figure 7-14).
Figure 7-15
Figure 7-14

Left Cover Removal 2. Slide the left cover to the rear of the instrument about 1h-inch
To remove: to clear the bezel hanger nuts and lift off. (See Figure 7-17).
1. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the two lower left

side cover retaining screws. (See Figure 7-16).
Figure 7-17
Figure 7-16

RBC and WBC Aperture Plate Removal 3. Pull the Aperture Plate straight out. (See Figure 7-19).
To prepare:
NOTE: Before attempting to remove the Aperture Plates, make sure
the instrument is ON.
1. From the MAIN MENU, press [SPECIAL PROTOCOLS] then

[MORE] followed by [DRAIN BATHS].
To remove:
for Model 1700 or page 7-5 for Model 1700CS).
2. Locate the von Behrens RBC Transducer and swivel the red
Aperture Plate Retaining Arm outward. (See Figure 7-18).
Figure 7-19
Figure 7-18

NOTE: The cutout notch in the Aperture Plate must be facing down von Behrens WBC and RBClPLT Transducer Removal
and toward the instrument when the plate is reinserted into the
Both the von Behrens RBC and WBC transducers are removed accord-
transducer. Also note the "RP" etched in the Aperture Plate.
ing to the following procedure:
(See Figure 7-20).
To prepare:
2. Remove the top cover (page 7-7).
3. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the 2 screws holding
the aluminum shield at the top of the PAM (Pre-Amplifier Mod-
ule) and remove the shield. (See Figure 7-21).
Figure 7-20
4. Repeat the same procedure to remove the WBC Aperture
Plate. Note the location of the cutout notch and "WBC" etched
in the Aperture Plate.
After reassembly:
1. Verify appropriate gain adjustment (Section 8.13). After install-
ing the RBC/PLT Aperture Plate, verify RBC/PLT gains. After
installing the WBC Aperture Plate, verify WBC gain.
Figure 7-21
4. If any fluid remains in the transducers, make sure the instru-
ment is turned ON. From the MAIN MENU, press [SPECIAL
PROTOCOLS] then [MORE] followed by [DRAIN BATHS].
Turn the instrument OFF after the transducers have been
drained.

At... CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before 7. Label and disconnect all tubing from the von Behrens WBC
l.ll attempting to remove any electrical connection. Transducer. (See Rgure 7-23).
To Remove the von Behrens WBC Transducer:

5. Disconnect the WBC cable connector J4 from the PAM.
(See Figure 7-22).
(.1
Figure 7-23
Figure 7-22
6. Snake wiring J4 through the Flow Panel.

8. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 3 mounting 9. Lift the transducer assembly out of the instrument.
screws from the transducer holding plate. (See Figure 7-24). (See Figure 7-25).
Figure 7-24 Figure 7-25

To Remove the von Behrens RBC/PLT Transducer: After reassembly:

10. For the von Behrens RBC/PLT Transducer, disconnect the 1. Verify WBC gain after installing von Behrens WBC Transducer
RBC cable connector J2 from the PAM. (See Figure 7-26). (Section 8.13).
2. Verify RBC/PLT gains after installing von Behrens RBC/PLT
Transducer. (Section 8.13).
Figure 7-26
11 . Snake the wiring J2 through the Flow Panel.
12. Label and disconnect all tubing from the von Behrens
RBC/PLT Transducer.
screws from the transducer holding plate. (Refer to Step 9 of
the von Behrens WBC Transducer Removal procedure on
page 7-15).
14. Uft the transducer assembly out of the instrument. (Refer to
the von Behrens WBC Transducer Removal procedure on this
page).

WBC and RBC Metering Board Removal 5. Disconnect the tubing at the top and bottom of the metering
tube. (See Figure 7-28).
To remove the WBC Metering Board:
2. Make sure the metering tube is drained by opening the vent so-
lenoid 2-1 located directly above the WBC Metering Board.
IA.. CAUTION: Before starting this procedure, make sure

~ power to the instrument is turned OFF.
3. If any fluid remains in the metering tube before disassembly,

drain it carefully using absorbent tissues.
a
4. Using Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 screws on the
metering board's transparent plastic shield. (See Figure 7-27).
Figure 7-28
',,"'JIl//ff!lt!:iJ!!IIIlIiIIlJr
CAUTION: When removing tubing, take extreme care not to break

the glass ends. The metering tube ends are fragile.
CAUTION: Take extreme care not to allow the liquid to

touch the printed circuit boards; it will short them out when
power is turned on. If board does get wet, make sure it is
dry before turning power back on.
Figure 7-27

6. Using a 1/4 -inch nut driver, remove the 2 standoffs on the 10. Uft the board off the Flow Panel. (See Figure 7-30).
board. (See Figure 7-29).
V····
Figure 7-30
Figure 7-29
To remove the RBC Metering Board:
~ ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING 1. Remove the upper front cover (page 7-5 for Model 1700 or
~ ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES. page 7-4 for Model 170OCS) and lower front cover (page 7-6
7. Unplug the ground wire on the bottom standoff.
2. Make sure the metering tube is drained by opening the vent so-
lenoid (the horizontal solenoid directly above the RBC Meter-
IA. CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before ing Board).
ill attempting to remove any electrical connection.
IA. CAUTION: Before starting this procedure, make sure
8. Disconnect the red connector on the side of the metering
ill power to the instrument is turned OFF.
board.
9. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting 3. If any fluid remains in the metering tube before disassembly,
screws holding the metering board to the Flow Panel. drain it carefully using absorbent tissues.
4. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 screws on the
metering board's transparent plastic shield. (Refer to Step 4 of
the WBC and RBC Metering Board Removal procedure on
page 7-17).

5. Disconnect the tUbing at the top and bottom of the metering NOTE: The RBC Metering Board is installed upside down. Push the
tube. (Refer to Step 5 of the WBC and RBC Metering Board metering tube all the way down to access the top screw hold-
Removal procedure on page 7-17). ing the metering board to the Flow Panel.
(See Figure 7-31).
CAUTION: When removing tubing, take extreme care not to break
the glass ends. The metering tube ends are fragile.
~
CAUTION: Take extreme care not to allow the liquid to
touch the printed circuit boards; it will short them out when
power is turned on. If board does get wet, make sure it is
dry before turning power back on.
6. Using a 1/4 -inch nut driver, remove the 2 standoffs on the

board. (Refer to Step 6 of the WBC and RBC Metering Board
Removal procedure on page 7-18).
..6.. ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING

7. Unplug the ground wire on the bottom standoff.

Figure 7-31
A CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before 9. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting
screws holding the metering board to the Flow Panel.
~ attempting to remove any electrical connection.
10. Lift the board off the Flow Panel. (Refer to Step 10 of the WBC
and RBC Metering Board Removal procedure on page 7-18).
8. Disconnect the red connector on the side of the metering
board. After reassembly:
1. Verify the appropriate count times (Section 8.6):
a. Verify the RBC/PLT count times after installing the RBC/PLT
Metering Board.
b. Verify the WBC count times after installing the WBC Meter-
ing Board.

Hemoglobin Flow Cell Removal 5. Swivel the top inner cover upward and to the rear. This cover
To prepare: is hinged and will stand in a folded back position without sup-
port. (See Figure 7-33).
1. From the MAIN MENU, press [SPECIAL PROTOCOLS] then
[MORE] followed by [DRAIN BATHS].
To remove:
1. Turn power to the instrument OFF.
4. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, loosen the 2 holding screws
on the top inner cover. (See Figure 7-32).
Figure 7-33
6. Remove the aluminum shield at the top of the PAM (Pre-Ampli-
fier Module). (Refer to Step 3 in the von Behrens WBC and
RBC Transducer Removal procedure on page 7-13.)
A CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before

Figure 7-32

8. Snake the HGB cable through the hole at the right side of the
...0... ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING wac Metering Board and pull it through the hole.
~ ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES. (See Figure 7-35).
7. Disconnect cable connector J1 (HGB cable) from the PAM.
(See Figure 7-34).
Figure 7-35
Figure 7-34
7 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 7-?1

9. Remove the black tUbing from the T-connector above and be- 10. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the two retaining
low the HGB Flow Cell. (See Figure 7-36). screws holding the HGB Flow Cell to the Flow Panel.
(See Figure 7-37).
Figure 7-36
Figure 7-37
11. Snake the HGB cable behind the tubing installed at solenoid 2-
CAUTION: The tUbing is stiff. Use care when removing the tubing 6 and remove the HGB Flow Cell module.
to avoid breaking it off the HGB Flow Cell.
After reassembly:
1. After reassembly, perform HGB Zero Offset and HGB Gain Ad-
justment (Table 8-7 in Section 8.12).
2. Verify HGB precision.

Sample Probe Driver Assembly Removal CAunON: Make sure the power is turned OFF before
To prepare: attempting to remove any electrical connection.
page 7-4 for Model 1700CS) and lower front cover (page 7-6 To remove:
~
.a. ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES.
3. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver,loosen the 2 holding screws
on the top inner cover. (See Figure 7-38). 5. Mark and remove the cable connectors at the top of the cable
distribution board. There are four connectors that must be un-
plugged from this board: J20, J21, J22, and J23.
(See Figure 7-39).
Figure 7-38
4. Fold back the top inner cover (refer to Step 5 of the Hemoglo-
bin Flow Cell Removal procedure on page 7-20). Figure 7-39
6. Cut cable ties holding cables to other cables; there are ap-
proximately 8-10 cable ties.
7. Using a 3h2-inch Allen wrench, remove the two clamps holding
the Wash Block tubing and one clamp holding the aspiration
tubing.

8. Label and disconnect the 2 tubings from the Wash Block. 9. Disconnect the tubing from the top of the Sample Probe.
(See Figure 7-40). (See Figure 7-41).

12. Using a 7/64-inch Allen wrench, remove the 2 top and 2 bottom
~ ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING mounting screws holding the Sample Probe Driver Assembly
to the chassis. (See Figure 7-43).
10. Disconnect the Sample Probe motor cable from the top chop-
per board. (See Figure 7-42).
Figure 7-43
13. Uft the Sample Probe Driver Assembly out of the instrument.
Figure 7-42
NOTE: Before lifting the Sample Probe Driver Assembly completely
11. Disconnect the Sample Probe motor cable from the bottom out of the instrument, check to make sure that all cables have
chopper board (located directly under the top chopper board). been disconnected. Disconnect any cables that you find still at-
tached, making sure to mark them before unplugging.
After reassembly:
1. Verify Sample Probe alignment (Section 8.15).
7 !REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 7-25

PAM (Pre-Amplifier Module) Removal 7. Flip the latch up and to the right. (See Figure 7-45).
To prepare:
3. Remove the bezel (page 7-8).
4. Remove the aluminum shield at the top of the PAM. (Refer to
Step 3 of the von Behrens WBC and RBC/PLT Transducer Re-
moval procedure on page page 7-13).
5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the lower screw on
the bezel latch bracket attached to the chassis.
(See Figure 7-44).
Figure 7-45
Figure 7-44
6. Loosen but do not remove the top screw on the latch.

8. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the two left retain- CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before
ing screws on the left side of the PAM cover plate and loosen attempting to remove any electrical connection.
the two right retaining screws. (See Figure 7-46).
.a.
~
ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING
10. Mark the 4 cables (J1, J2, J3, and J4) at the top of the PAM
board and disconnect them. (See Figure 7-47).
Figure 7-46
9. Slide the PAM cover to the left and off the PAM board.
Figure 7-47
11. Using a 1/4 -inch nut driver, remove the four metal standoffs on
the PAM board.

12. Lift the PAM board off the Flow Panel. (See Figure 7-48). Diluent Syringe Driver Assembly Removal
To remove:
2. Loosen and told back the top inner cover (refer to Steps 4 and 5
of the Hemoglobin Flow Cell Removal procedure on page 7-20).
3. Remove the left side cover (page 7-11 ).

ill attempting to remove any electrical connection.
4. The fan above the Diluent Syringe Driver Assembly must be re-
moved before the driver assembly can be removed. To remove
the fan:
Figure 7-48 (a) Remove the 2 top fan screws. (See Figure 7-49).
After Reassembly:
1. Perform PAM printed circuit board adjustments (Section 8.12),

and verify MAM printed circuit board adjustments (Section 8.13).
Figure 7-49

(b) Loosen the 2 bottom fan bracket screws. (See Figure 7-50). 5. Disconnect the tubing on both sides of the directional valve at
the top of the Diluent Syringe. (See Figure 7-51).
....... ,~,i"<:> . ,,~,,

Figure 7-50
Figure 7-51
(c) If necessary, rotate the split pin installed on the directional
valve drive linkage of the Diluent Syringe to allow the fan to 6. Cut the cable ties holding the cable harness to the back of the
be removed. syringe assembly.
(d) Pull the fan to the rear. 7. Disconnect ribbon cable #445 from the back of the driver as-
sembly board, then disconnect ribbon cable #444.
(e) Disconnect the fan power cable.

8. Using a 7/64-inch Allen wrench, remove the 2 socket head 10. Lift the Diluent Syringe Driver Assembly out of the chassis.
screws on the front of the bottom holding plate of the driver as- (See Figure 7-53).
sembly. (See Figure 7-52).
Figure 7-53
Figure 7-52
After reassembly:
9. Using a 7/64-inch Allen wrench, remove the screw from the rear
base plate of the driver assembly. 1. Verify diluent volume (Section 8.14); verify calibration block
alignment (Section 8.16).

Diluent Syringe Removal

The procedure for removing the Diluent Syringe is covered in the
CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual. Refer to Section 9: service and
Maintenance, Subsection: Diluent Syringe Cleaning.

Sample Syringe Driver Assembly Removal 10. Lift the Sample Syringe Driver Assembly out of the chassis.

2. Loosen and fold back the top inner cover (refer to Steps 4 and 5
3. Remove the left side cover (page 7-11 ).

4. Remove the fan located above the Diluent Syringe Driver As-
sembly (refer to Step 4 of the Diluent Syringe Driver Assembly
Removal procedure on page 7-28).
5. Disconnect the tUbing on top of the Sample Syringe.
Figure 7-54
6. Cut the cable ties holding the cable harness to the back of the
syringe assembly. After reassembly:
7. Disconnect ribbon cable #441 from the chopper driver board. 1. Verify sample volume (Section 8.14).
8. Using a 7/64-Allen wrench, remove the 2 socket head screws
on the bottom plate of the driver assembly (refer to Step 8 of
the Diluent Syringe Driver Assembly procedure on page 7-30).
9. Using a 7/64-Allen wrench, remove the screw from the rear
base plate of the driver assembly.
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-· February 1995

CELL-DYN@ 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-· February 1995
Sample Syringe Removal Lyse Syringe Driver Assembly Removal

The procedure for removing the Sample Syringe is covered in the To remove:
CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual. Refer to Section 9: service and
Maintenance, Subsection: Sample Syringe CleaninglRemoval. 1. Remove the top cover (page 7-7).
3. Remove the left side cover (page 7-11).
At... CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before

4. The solenoid panel above the Lyse Syringe Driver Assembly

must be removed before the driver assembly can be removed.
To remove the solenoid panel:
(a) Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 top screws
holding the solenoid panel to the chassis. (See Figure 7-55).
Figure 7-55
(b) Remove the tubes from the solenoids.

(c) Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 screws on 5. Disconnect the tubing from the top of the Lys$ Syringe.
the bottom of the inner bracket of the solenoid panel. (See Figure 7-57).
(See Figure 7-56).
Figure 7-57
Figure 7-56
6. Disconnect ribbon cable #446 from the choppier driver board.
(d) Pull the solenoid panel to the rear and set aside.
7. Using a 7/6 4-inch Allen wrench, remove the 2 socket head
screws on the bottom plate of the driver assembly (refer to
Step 8 of the Diluent Syringe Driver Assembly procedure on
page 7-30).
8. Using a 7/6 4-inch Allen wrench, remove the screw from the rear
base plate of the driver assembly.

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A -. February 1995
9. Lift the Lyse Syringe Driver Assembly out of the chassis. Lyse Syringe Removal
(See Figure 7-58).
The procedure for removing the Lyse Syringe is covered in the
CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual. Refer to Section 9: Service and
Maintenance, Subsection: Lyse Syringe CleanlnglRemoval.
Figure 7-58

Fluid Power Supply Removal 4. Label and disconnect the tUbing from solenoid 5-5.

NOTE: Cut the cable ties on the cables surrounding the Fluid Power
Supply assembly as needed.
3. Label and disconnect the tubing from the T-connector at the

top of solenoid 5-6. (See Figure 7-59).
Figure 7-60
Figure 7-59
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-. February 1995

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A!- February 1995
5. Label and disconnect the tubing from the T-connector of the 6. Label and disconnect the tubing from solenoid 5-1.
0.5 psi supply line located behind the Flow Panel. (See Figure 7-62).
(See Figure 7-61).
Rgure7-62
Figure 7-61
8. Cut cable ties and disconnect the tUbing from the chassis floor
fitling next to the left pump assembly.
9. Disconnect the TYGON® tubing connected to the reagent
panel waste line (at the rear of the Reagent Inlet Panel).
10. Locate solenoid 1-6 and its corresponding sili¢one tubing. Fol-
low the tubing to the back of the Flow Panel, then label and dis-
connect the tubing at the in-line connector. Pull the line
through the hole to the back of the Flow Panel.

11. Remove the clamp and plug from the Vacuum Accumulator CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before
drain line, and pull the tubing through the rear of the Reagent attempting to remove any electrical connection.
Inlet Panel. (See Figure 7-63).
~ ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FoR HANDLING

12. Disconnect connector J6 from the Pump Relay board.

(See Figure 7-64).
Rgure 7-63
Figure 7-64

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A t-- February 1995
13. Disconnect connector Jl from the Pump Relay board. 15. Disconnect the solenoid cable from connector!J8 on the Sole-
(See Figure 7-65). noid Driver board. (See Figure 7-66).

14. Disconnect connector Jl (three-pin cable) from the Internal 16. Disconnect connector J1 0 from the Solenoid Driver board.
Waste Sensor printed circuit board located directly under the
Pump Relay board.

17. Using an 18 inch or longer Phillips-head screwdriver, remove 18. Uft the Ruid Power Supply directly up and out of the instru-
the 3 corner mounting screws and the 1 central mounting ment. (See Figure 7-68).
screw holding the Fluid Power Supply to the base of the chas-
sis. (See Figure 7-67).
Figure 7-67
Figure 7-68
After reassembly:
1. Perform vacuum and pressure adj ustments (~ection 8.5) and
verify all count times (Section 8.6) .

,
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A -: February 1995
MPM (Motor Processor Module) Board Removal Repeat this procedure for the snap-in pin at tHe center of the
To remove: board.
1. Remove the top cover (page 7-7). 5. Lift the MPM board off the top inner cover.
2. Loosen and fold back the top inner cover (refer to Steps 4 and 5 After reassembly:
of the Hemoglobin Flow Cell Removal procedure on page 7-20). 1. Perform the motor power test. (Refer to Table 5·3 and Figure 5-4
in Section 5).
...0.. ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING

3. Label and disconnect all cable connectors leading to the MPM

board. (See Figure 7-69).
Figure 7-69
4. At each corner of the MPM board, compress the plastic snap-
in pins and pull the comer of the board free from the pin.

7 REMOVAL ANO REPLACEMENT 7-42
COM (Cable Distribution Module) Board Removal peat this procedure for the snap-in pin at the center of the
To remove: board.
1. Remove the top cover (page 7-7). 5. Lift the COM board off the top inner cover.
At.. CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before

~
.a. ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING
3. Label and disconnect all cables and connectors leading to the

COM bOard. (See Figure 7-70).
Figure 7-70
4. At each corner of the COM board, compress the plastic snap-
in pin and pull the corner of the board free from the pin. Re-
CELL-OYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A -. February 1995

CRT Assembly Removal CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before
To remove: attempting to remove any electrical connection.

6. Disconnect the power cord to the CRT. (See Figure 7-72).
3. Remove the right side cover. (page 7-10)
screws holding the PDM (Power Distribution Module) to the
CRT Assembly chassis. (See Figure 7-71).
Figure 7-72
Figure 7-71
5. Lift the PDM off the CRT chassis (cables still attached).

7. Disconnect the video connector to the SVGA board. DANGER: The CRT Assembly contains high voltage. Do
(See Figure 7·73). not touch the top of the CRT. Make sure y~ur ESD strap is
OFF.
8. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 4 screws hold-

ing the CRT Assembly to the instrument chassis. Make sure
the CRT Assembly is supported while removing the screws.
(See Figure 7-74).
Figure 7-73
CAUTION: Wear OSHA-approved safety glasses. Use extreme
care when removing the CRT to prevent possible CRT implosion
which could cause physical injury to exposed skin or eyes.
Figure 7-74
CEll-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A- February 1995

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A '-. February 1995
9. Lift the CRT Assembly out of the instrument. (See Figure 7-75). CPU Assembly Removal
To remove:
3. Remove the right side cover (page 7-10).

~ ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING

4. Label and disconnect the J1 and J2 connectors on the PDM.

Figure 7-75 (See Figure 7-76).
Figure 7-76

5. Disconnect the PC Power Supply cable (J4) from the Power 13. Slide the CPU Assembly out of the instrument.
Supply Module AC board (refer to Step 4 of the Main Power (See Figure 7-77).
Supply Removal procedure on page 7-52).
6. Disconnect the video connector to the SVGA board (refer to Step
7 of the CRT Assembly Removal procedure on Page 7-43).
7. Disconnect the standard PC Keyboard cable and any external
cables connected to the Graphics Printer or Ticket Printer Inter-
face boards.
8. Disconnect the 20-pin CCM communications cable from the
DLAboard.
screws holding the frame cover to the lower right side of the in-
strument (refer to Step 8 of the Main Power Supply Removal
procedure on page 7-53).
10. Lift the frame cover off the instrument.
screws on the lower right side of the instrument holding the
CPU Assembly to the chassis (refer to Step 10 of the Main
Power Supply Removal procedure on page 7-53).
12. Using a stubby Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 3 front Figure 7-77
mounting screws holding the CPU Assembly to the chassis.
(refer to Step 11 of the Main Power Supply Removal proce-
dure on page 7-54).
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A _. February 1995

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A February 1995
PC Power Supply Removal 6. Remove the ground wire attached to the front of the disk drive
To remove: chassis. (See Figure 7-78).

3. Remove the CPU Assembly (page 7-45).
A.
CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before

4. Label and disconnect connectors J1 and J2 on the PDM (Refer

to Step 4 of the CPU Assembly Removal procedure on page 7-
45). Figure 7-78
5. Disconnect the power connectors on the back of the Floppy
Disk Drive and Hard Disk Drive.

7. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting 9. Lift the PC Power Supply directly up and out of the CPU As-
screws, located on the right side of the instrument, holding the sembly. (See Figure 7-80).
PC Power Supply to the CPU Assembly. Make sure the power
~, :',··········,""
'.,
supply is supported while removing the screws. (See Figure 7-79). ..
.~*Yf:':·
I·················
Figure 7-80
Figure 7-79
8. Disconnect the PC Power Supply AC input.
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A - ' February 1995

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A February 1995
I/O Boards Removal- CLA, SVGA, Ticket Printer, and Graphics CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before
PrinterlDisk Controller attempting to remove any electrical connection.
There are 4 boards plugged into the CPU Motherboard. As you face
the right side of the instrument, the 4 1/0 boards are located from right
to left as follows: To remove the DLA board:
1. The DLA (Data Link Adapter) board is located next to the Ana- 1. Remove the CPU Assembly (page 7-45).
log Card Cage.
2. The SVGA board is the second board from the card cage. ...0... ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING
3. The Ticket Printer Interface board is the third board from the
card cage. 2. Disconnect the Membrane Keypad ribbon cable and the CCM
(Cell Count Module) communications ribbon cable from the
4. The Graphics Printer and Disk Drive Controller Interface board DLA board. (See Figure 7-81).
is the fourth board from the card cage.
Figure 7-81

3. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the bracket mount- CPU Motherboard Removal
ing screw holding the DLA board to the instrument chassis.
To remove:
(See Figure 7-82).
A CAUTION: Make sure the power is turn~d OFF before

2. Remove the PC Power Supply (page 7-47).
3. Remove the 110 boards (page 7-49).
...0... ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONi.S FOR HANDLING

4. Remove the lithium battery cable connector on the CPU

Motherboard.
Figure 7-82
4. Lift the DLA board directly up and out of the instrument.
To remove the SVGA, Ticket Printer, or Graphics PrinterlDisk Control-
ler board:
1. Remove the CRT Assembly (page 7-43).
...0... ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING

2. Disconnect any external or intemal cable connected to the

board.
3. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the bracket mount-
ing screw holding the board to the instrument (refer to Step 3
in the DLA procedure above).
4. Lift the board directly up and out of the instrument.

5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 board mount- Disk Drive Assembly Removal
ing screws holding the CPU Motherboard to the CPU Assem-
bly. (See Figure 7-83). To remove:


2. Disconnect the power supply cables to the FlOppy Disk Drive

and Hard Disk Drive.
3. Disconnect the ribbon cables on the back of the Floppy Disk
Drive and Hard Disk Drive.
4. Remove the ground wire attached to the front of the disk drive
Figure 7-83 chassis (refer to Step 5 of the PC Power Supply Removal pro-
6. Slide the CPU Motherboard forward until the plastic snap-in cedure on page 7-47).
pins are free of the metal base, then lift off the instrument.
NOTE: If changing the CPU Motherboard, reuse the plastic snap-in
pins for the new board.

5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the remaining 3 Main (Linear) Power Supply Removal
mounting screws holding the Disk Drive Assembly to the instru-
ment chassis. (See Rgure 7-84). To remove:

fA.. CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before

4. Label and disconnect the power cable connectors J1 through

J8 and J 13 on the Power Supply Module AC board.
(See Figure 7-85).
Figure 7-84
6. Lift the Disk Drive Assembly up and out of the instrument.
7. Remove and replace the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive
from the Disk Drive Assembly as needed.
Figure 7-85
5. Label and disconnect connectors J1 and J2 on the PDM (refer to
Step 4 of the CPU Assembly Removal procedure on page 7-45).
6. Disconnect the video connector to the SVGA bo4rd (refer to Step
7 of the CRT Assembly Removal procedure on page 7-44).

9140265A _. February 1995
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A _: February 1995
7. Disconnect the standard PC Keyboard cable and any external 10. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 14 mounting
cables connected to the Graphics Printer or Ticket Printer Inter- screws (2 are exposed by the removal of the frame cover) on
face boards. the lower right side of the instrument holding the CPU Assem-
bly to the chassis. (See Figure 7-87).
screws holding the frame cover to the lower right side of the in-
strument. (See Figure 7-86).
Figure 7-87
Figure 7-86
9. Lift the frame cover off the instrument frame.

11. Using a stubby Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 3 front 12. Slide the CPU Assembly forward and out of ttie instrument.
mounting screws holding the CPU Assembly to the chassis. (See Figure 7-89).
(See Figure 7-88).
Figure 7-89
Figure 7-88

13. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 base mount- 14. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove th~ 8 mounting
ing screws on the bottom of the Main Power Supply Assembly. screws on the back of the instrument holding fhe Main Power
(See Figure 7-90). Supply Assembly to the chassis. (See Figure 7-91).

15. Disconnect the DC cables J1 , J2, J4, and J5 on the Power 17. Pull the Main Power Supply Assembly out thJ back of the in-
Supply Module DC board. (See Figure 7-92). strument. (See Figure 7-93).
NOTE: Cut the cable ties as needed.
16. Pull the ribbon cable out of the snap holder at the bottom front
of the Main Power Supply.

9140265A -'- February 1995
Cage-Mounted Printed Circuit Boards Removal NOTE: When reinserting a board into its slot at the re~r of its cage,
Prior to removing any of the cage-mounted boards: press it firmly into place to ensure proper seati~g.
h... CAUTION: Make sure the power is turned OFF before

To remove any of the boards:

1. Disconnect all cables attached to the board.

2. Open the top and bottom plastic mounting tabs which will pull
the board slightly out of the cage. (See Figure 7-94).
-
~I
"·1 .:
Figure 7-94
3. Pull the board out of the instrument.
7 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

7-57
Switching Power Supply Removal Needle Drive Assembly Removal- Closed Sample Module
To remove: To remove:
At... CAUTION: Before removing any electrical connection,

1. Using a slotted screwdriver, remove the 4 mounting screws
ill make sure power to the instrument is turned OFF.
holding the hinged Interlock Cover to the Closed Sample Mod-
ule. (See Figure 7-96).
1. Disconnect the 2 cable connectors on the 24V Switching

Power Supply Module. (See Figure 7-95).
Figure 7-96
2. Remove the Interlock Cover.
Figure 7-95 3. Remove the black VACUTAINER® tube holder by pulling it

straight up and out of the needle housing well.
2. At each corner of the 24V Switching Power Supply Module,
compress the plastic snap-in pin and pull the corner of the
board free from the pin.
3. Lift the 24V Switching Power Supply Module out of the instru-
ment.
After reassembly:
1. Verify the 0.5 volts adjustment (Section 8.7).

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A L February 1995
4. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting 5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove th~ 2 mounting
screws under the tube guide. (See Figure 7-97). screws under the Closed Sample Module and! lift the cover off
the module. (See Figure 7-98).
Figure 7-97
Figure 7·98
6. Disconnect the silicone tubing from the top of the Needle Drive
Assembly.
7. Loosen the thumbscrew on the front of the Closed Sample
Module and swing the module outward.
7 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

8. Disconnect the sample line tUbing from the Peristaltic Pump 9. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 2 mounting screws
tubing. (See Figure 7-99). on the chopper driver board cover plate. (See Figure 7-1 (0).

9140265A- February 1995
10. Disconnect the Needle Drive Assembly connector (J2) from 11. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 4 screws hold-
the chopper driver board. (See Figure 7-101). ing the Needle Drive Assembly to the Closed Sample Module
frame. (See Figure 7-102).
Figure 7-101
Figure 7-102
7 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 7-R1

12. Carefully pull the Needle Drive Assembly forward and out of Chopper Driver Board Removal- Closed Sample Module
the Closed Sample Module. (See Figure 7-103).
To remove:
1. Loosen the thumbscrew on the front of the Closed Sample
Module and swing the module outward.
screws on the chopper driver board cover plate (refer to Step 9
of the Needle Drive Assembly Removal procedure, page 7-60).
~
..a... ATTENTION: OBSERVE PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING
3. Disconnect the 2 cables on the chopper driver board.

4. Using a 1/4 -inch nut driver, remove the two standoffs from the
chopper driver board. (See Figure 7-104).
Figure 7-103
Figure 7-104
5. Lift the chopper driver board off the Closed Sample Module.

Sample and Diluent Pumps Removal- Closed Sample Module 4. Disconnect the 3 silicone tubings from the Sample Cup.
To remove the Sample Peristaltic Pump: (See Figure 7-106).
1. Loosen the thumbscrew on the front of Closed Sample Module

and swing the module outward.
2. Remove the tUbing from behind the Sample Peristaltic Pump.
screws holding the Sample Peristaltic Pump housing to the
Closed Sample Module. (See Figure 7-105).
Figure 7-106
Figure 7-105

5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 3 remaining cor- 7. Disconnect the motor cable from the chopper driver board corre-
ner mounting screws and 1 central mounting screw on the peri- sponding to the Sample Peristaltic Pump. (See Rgure 7-108).
staltic pump support plate. (See Figure 7-107).
Figure 7-108
Figure 7-107
8. Pull the Sample Peristaltic Pump off the Closed Sample Module.
6. Carefully pull the support plate forward to gain access to the
chopper driver boards. To remove the Diluent Peristaltic Pump:
1. Loosen the thumbscrew on the front of Closed Sample Module
and swing the module outward.
2. Remove the tubing from behind the Diluent Peristaltic Pump.
screws holding the Diluent Peristaltic Pump housing to the
Closed Sample Assembly (do not remove the upper right
screw on the sample pump housing). Refer to Step 3 of the
Sample Peristaltic Pump Removal procedure, page 7-63.
4. Disconnect the 3 silicone tubings from the Sample Cup (refer
to Step 4 of the Sample Peristaltic Pump Removal procedure,
page 7-63).

5. Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, remove the 3 remaining cor- Fan Air Filter Removal
ner mounting screws and 1 central mounting screw on the Peri-
To remove:
staltic Pump support plate (refer to Step 5 of the Sample
Peristaltic Pump Removal procedure, page 7-64). 1. Grasp the plastic air filter holder at one of the corners and
snap off. No tools are necessary.
6. Carefully pull the support plate forward to gain access to the
chopper driver boards. 2. Remove the old filter from the holder and replace it with a new
filter.
7. Disconnect the motor cable from the chopper driver board cor-
responding to the Diluent Peristaltic Pump. 3. Snap the plastic holder back into place.
8. Pull the Diluent Peristaltic Pump off the Closed Sample Mod-
ule.
After reassembly:
1. Perform the motor power test (refer to Table 5-3 and Figure 5-
4 in Section 5).
2. Verify CS precision. Verify open/closed operation.

Section 8
ALIGNMENT AND VERIFICATION PROCEDURES
Table of Contents
8.2 TEST EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES REQUIRED
8.3 PREPARATION FOR ALIGNMENTNERIFICATION
8.4 ORDER OF ALIGNMENTNERIFICATION
8.5 VACUUM AND PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS
Regulator Alignment
Pressure Adjustment (0.5 psi)
Pressure Verification (High)
Vacuum Adjustment (8 inch)
8.6 METERING SYSTEM TIMING ADJUSTMENTS - RBC AND WBC
RBC Metering System Timing Adjustment
WBC Metering System Timing Adjustment
8.7 24V SWITCHING MODULE ADJUSTMENT-
8.8 POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE TEST POINTS
8.9 CABLE DISTRIBUTION MODULE TEST POINTS
8.10 SIGNAL PROCESSOR MODULE ADJUSTMENT

Section 8 ALIGNMENT AND VERIFICATION
8.11 DEVICE CONTROL MODULE ADJUSTMENT
8.12 PRE-AMPLIFIER MODULE ADJUSTMENT
Pre-Amplifier Module (PAM) Test Points
Pre-Amplifier Module Adjustment
8.13 MAIN AMPLIFIER OFFSET and GAIN ADJUSTMENT ALIGNMENT
WBC Offset
WBC Gain
RBC Offset
RBC Gain
RER Adjustment
PLT Offset
PLT Gain
8.14 DILUENT AND SAMPLE VERIFICATION/ADJUSTMENT
Diluent Volume Verification
Sample Volume Verification
8.15 SAMPLE PROBE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Stepper Motor Power Test and Verification
Lower Microswitch #1 Adjustment
Upper Microswitch #2 Adjustment
Left Microswitch #3 Adjustment
Right Microswitch #4 Adjustment
8.16 DILUENT SYRINGE CALIBRATION BLOCK ADJUSTMENT
8.17 SHORT SAMPLE SENSOR (1700CS) ADJUSTMENT

List of Tables
Table 8-1 Metering Timing Fault Report
Table 8-2 POM Test Points
Table 8-3 COM Test Points
Table 8-4 SPM Alignments
Table 8-5 OCM Alignment
Table 8-6 PAM Test Points
Table 8-7 Pre-Amp Alignments
List of Figures
Figure 8-1 CELL-OYN 1700 Metering Timing Chart
Figure 8-2 RBC Metering Tube
Figure 8-3 WBC Metering Tube
Figure 8-4 PDM Test Points
Figure 8-5 SPM Test Points
Figure 8-6 OCM Test Points
Figure 8-7 PAM Test Points
Figure 8-8 MAM Test Points
Figure 8-9 WBC Gain Adjustments
Figure 8-10 RBC Gain Adjustments
CELL-OYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 8-3

Figure 8-11 Cell Edit Chart
Figure 8-12 Editing Ratio Displays
Figure 8-13 PLT Gain Adjustments
Figure 8-14 Diluent Syringe

This chapter discusses the alignment and verification procedures for the CELL-DYN 1700. These
procedures are used to ensure the proper electronic alignment of the circuitry.
These procedures also serve as a method of isolating a defective assembly, module, or printed circuit
board.
Service representatives must ensure that all external components of the system, such as reagents,
blood samples used, controls and calibrators, environment, and AC power, are acceptable and cor-
rect before proceeding with the alignment and verification procedures.
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Consider all specimens and reagents,

controls, calibrators, etc. that contain human blood or serum as potentially
infectious. Use established, safe laboratory working procedures when han-
dling these samples. Wear gloves, lab coats, and safety glasses, and follow
other biosafety practices as specified in the OSHA Bloodborne Pathogen
Rule (29 CFR Part 1910, 1030) or other equivalent biosafety procedures.
8.2 TEST EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES REQUIRED
ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION

1 1 DIGITAL VOLTMETER
3 3 5-inch JUMPER LEADS
4 1 STOPWATCH

ITEM QTY DESCRIPTION
5 1 VACUUM GAUGE 0-30 INCHES
6 1 PRESSURE GAUGE 0-5 lb.
7 1 PRESSURE GAUGE 0-10 Ibs.
8 1 LATEX SPHERES 5.0 or 5.01 DIA.
9 1 LATEX SPHERES 3.31 DIA.
10 3 HEMOSTATS
11 1 500 mL FLASK OR BEAKER
12 AR SILICONE TUBING
13 1 STANDARD TOOL KIT
14 AR FRESH BLOOD SAMPLES WITH REFERENCE VALUES
15 AR ASSAYED CONTROLS FOR CELL-DYN 1700
16 1 20K OHM 1% RESISTOR
17 1 15K OHM 1% RESISTOR
18 1 10 mL GRADUATED CYLINDER
19 AR 40
20 AR 100
21 AR 50 mL COUNTING CUPS
22 1 25 mL GRADUATED CYLINDER
23 1 12-INCH RULER WITH 1/16 INCREMENTS
24 1 OSCILLOSCOPE (OPTIONAL)

8.3 PREPARATION FOR ALIGNMENTNERIFICATION
Perform the following procedure to prepare the CELL-DYN 1700 for alignment/verification:
1. Verify all reagents are correct and available in sufficient quantities to perform 100-150
cycles on the instrument.
2. Remove the upper and lower front covers, left and right side covers, and top cover.
3. Remove and clean both RBC/PLT and WBC aperture plates following the procedure in
Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection: Aperture Plates Cleaning of the
CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual.
4. Clean the HGB Flow Cell following the procedure in Section 9, Subsection: HGB Flow
Cell Manual Cleaning of the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual.
5. Re-initialize the instrument by turning the system OFF then ON again. When
Initialization is complete, press [PRIME/RUN] to prime the instrument. Observe the flow
system for leaks, tubing placement, pinched tubing, etc.
6. Reinstall the covers on the instrument.
7. Run a Background count. Verify all background values are within the following
specifications:
• WBC < 0.5 KlflL
• RBC < 0.05 M/flL
• HGB < O. 1 g/dL
• PLT < 10.0 KlflL
8. Enter the date and time according to directions in Section 2: Installation Procedures

and Special Requirements, Subsection: DatelTime Key of the CELL-DYN 1700
Operations Manual.
9. In the MAIN MENU, press [CALIBRATION]. Record all Calibration Factors for Open,
Closed, and Pre-Dilute modes.
10. Type "94043" to display the DILUTION FACTORS screen. Record all Dilution Factors.
11. In the MAIN MENU, type "999" for Operator 10 and press Enter on the PC keyboard or
membrane keypad. This is to identify all runs performed by service personnel.
8.4 ORDER OF ALIGNMENTNERIFICATION
The following procedures are presented to ensure proper alignment of the CELL-DYN 1700.
1. Vacuum and Pressure Adjustment (Section 8.5)
2. RBC Count Time Adjustment (Section 8.6)
3. WBC Count Time Adjustment (Section 8.6)
4. 24V Switching Module Adjustment (Section 8.7)
5. Power Supply Voltage Checks and Adjustment (Section 8.8)
6. Signal Processor Module Alignment (Section 8.10)
7. Device Control Module Alignment (Section 8.11)
8. Pre-Amplifier Module Alignment (Section 8.12)
9. Main Amplifier Module Alignment (Section 8.13)

10. Diluent/Sample Verification/Alignment (Section 8.14)
11. Sample Probe Microswitch Alignment (Section 8.15)
12. Diluent Syringe Calibration Block Adjustment (Section 8.16)
13. Short Sample (1700CS) Sensor Adjustment (Section 8.17)
When performing adjustments:
• At the completion of each Vacuum and Pressure Adjustment procedure, verify the WBC and
RBC count times and normal system operation
• Prior to starting any electronic alignment, perform the Power Supply Voltage Check proce-
dure Sections 8.7 and 8.8)
• Whenever an alignment adjustment is performed on the Pre-Amplifier Module (PAM), verify
the affected parameters on the Main Amplifier Module (MAM). For example, if PLT is adjust-
ed on the PAM, then PLT should also be checked on the MAM.
8.5 VACUUM AND PRESSURE ADJUSTMENTS
The CELL-DYN 1700 utilizes one vacuum and two pressure levels to accomplish the following tasks:
moving sample, reagents, and waste, bubble mixing of sample, and backflushing RBC and WBC
apertures. The vacuum and bubble mix pressures are adjustable by a solid-state regulator. The
backflush pressure is not critical and the pump is under direct computer control.
The solid state regulator has two input ports: P1 for pressure and P2 for vacuum. It also has jumper
terminals which accommodate all desired vacuum and pressure ranges.

The jumper positions are:
Jumpers Pressure ~ Vacuum (inches Hg).
1. A-B 0.0 - 3.0 0.0 - 6.0
2. C-D 2.5 - 5.1 5.0 - 10.2
3. E-F 4.3 - 6.6 8.6 - 13.2
4. G-H 6.0 - 8.0 12.0 - 16.0
Regulator Alignment
This offset adjustment must be performed with no pressure or vacuum applied to the regulator. Fol-
low the steps below:
1. Disconnect the appropriate pumps on the pump relay module and bleed off pressure
from the accumulators.
• J4 for low pressure
• J2 for vacuum on new-style pumps
2. Remove the pressure or vacuum line from the top of the regulator.
3. On the Pump Relay Board, the voltage should be 5.0 +/- 0.15 volts at J7 pin 7 for
vacuum, and J8 pin 5 for pressure.
NOTE: You must remove the board mounting screws and free the rest of the board to make the re-
maining adjustments. Disconnect J6 or J7 while relocating the appropriate printed circuit board
to avoid shorting out components.
4. Note the current position of jumper E1 and set E1 to the C-D position.

5. Connect the DVM (Digitial Volt Meter) negative lead to TP3 (GND) on regulator board.
Connect the positive lead to TP2 (REF). The voltage should be 1.00V +/- 0.14 volts.
• If voltage is not correct, re-check step 3.
• If voltage is still not correct, replace the regulator.
6. Connect the DVM negative lead to TP1 and the positive lead to TP2, and read the
voltage. Adjust R18 for a voltage of 0.000 and +/- 0.005.
NOTE: If voltage is negative, turn R18 (offset) clockwise; if the voltage is positive, turn R18 counter-
clockwise.
7. Move jumper E1 back to the proper operating position.
8. Reconnect the pressure or vacuum line to the top of the regulator and reconnect the
cable(s) on the pump relay module.
Pressure Adjustment (0.5 psi)

Follow the steps below for pressure adjustment:
1. Remove the top cover and raise the top inner panel (refer to Section 7 for removal
instructions).
2. Locate the small silicone tubing connected to the in-line fitting at top of the 0.5 psi
Pressure Accumulator (located closest to the rear of the instrument).
3. Connect a 0-5 psi gauge in-line with the silicone tubing and fitting (the Pressure Ac-
cumulator is located on the part of the Fluid Power Supply which is closest to the
rear of the instrument).
4. Adjust R16 on the Regulator board for 0.5 psi + 0.0 and - 0.05.
5. Remove the gauge and reconnect the silicone tubing to in-line connector.
Pressure Verification (High)

Follow the steps below for pressure verification:
1. Locate solenoid valve 1-6 and trace the tubing back through the flow panel to the in-line
connector.
2. Connect a 0-30 psi gauge in-line.
3. In the RUN screen, press [CLEAR ORIFICE] while observing the gauge.
4. When the pump activates, verify a pressure of no less than 4 psi. If the pressure is less
than 4 psi, check for leaks. Replace the Pressure Pump if necessary.
Vacuum Adjustment (8 inch)

Follow the steps below for solid state regulator adjustment:
NOTE: This is a coarse adjustment only. The fine adjustment is predicated upon metering system
count times (Section 8.6). Make this coarse adjustment only if there is reason to believe that
the vacuum is grossly misadjusted.
1. Locate the solid state vacuum regulator on the rear side of the Fluid Power Supply (left
front side closest to the flow panel).
2. Remove the TYGON® tubing from the top of the Accumulator (located on the back of
the Fluid Power Supply closest to the flow panel) and connect a 0-30" Hg gauge in-line
between the tubing and the Accumulator.

3. Adjust R16 (accessible only from the front of the Fluid Power Supply) for
8" Hg +/- 0.2" Hg.
NOTE: Clockwise adjustment increases vacuum and counterclockwise adjustment decreases
vacuum.
4. Once R16 is adjusted, remove the vacuum gauge and reconnect the tubing line to
the regulator.
8.6 METERING SYSTEM TIMING ADJUSTMENTS - RBC AND WBC
The instrument uses the Volumetric Metering process to regulate the count cycle and to ensure that a
precise volume of sample is analyzed for the measurement. Table 8-1 shows the results of a fault
report displayed on the screen if a flow error or clog occurs during a Run cycle. Figure 8-1 illustrates
the timing relationships for WBC and RBC measurements.
For each transducer there are two distinct counting periods, T1 and T2. Figures 8-2 and 8-3 illustrate
the counting periods for the RBC and WBC metering tubes, respectively.

Clog Time Flow Error Time Valid Meniscus Clog Time
(Detector (in seconds) Time (in seconds)
Masked) (in seconds)
(in seconds)
WBC Upper 0-0.5 0.5 - 1.0 1.0 - 3.0 3.0+
WBC Lower 6.5+ or greater
0-3.5 3.5 - 4.0 4.0 - 6.5 than the moving
average
RBC/PLT Upper 0-3.0 3.0 - 4.0 4.0 - 6.0 6.0+
RBC/PLT Lower 7.5+ or greater
0-5.5 5.5 - 6.0 6.0 - 7.5 than the moving
average
Table 8-1: Metering Timing Fault Report

WBC
UPPER
0 1.0 3.0
LOWER
0 4.0 6.5
RBC/PLT
UPPER
0 4.0 6.0
LOWER
_ INVALID MENISCUS REGION (Detector Masked)

INVALID MENISCUS REGION (Flow Error)
L...-_'
;::;:;;:;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
VALID MENISCUS REGION
Figure 8-1 CELL-DYN 1700 Metering Timing Chart (In Seconds) SS00034A

RBCVALVE VENT
-
-
,........
(
~
TO TRANSDUCER I
'--
I~ T1
1m
~
D D UPPER DETECTOR
RBe
T2
~D D LOWER DETECTOR
Figure 8-2 RBe Metering Tube SS00021A

WBCVALVE VENT
-
.....
{
r--
TO TRANSDUCER I
'-- 0
T1
g
~
~
D D UPPER DETECTOR
WBC
T2
~D D LOWER DETECTOR
Figure 8-3 wac Metering Tube SS00022A

All count times are based on the vacuum level of the 8-inch vacuum reservoir and tubing length.
These count times are critical in that all clog and flow system alarms are generated via these count
times. The vacuum adjustment (refer to Section 8.5) sets the coarse vacuum requirement, but further
adjustments will be necessary to ensure proper timing for the flow system alerts.
RBC Metering System Timing Adjustment

Follow the steps below for adjusting the timing of the RBC metering system:
1. Ensure that the RBC aperture plate has been removed, cleaned, and reinstalled
following the procedure in Section 9: Service and Maintenance, Subsection:
Aperture Plates Cleaning of the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual.
2. Run a background count and verify that the RBC displayed count time (T2) is 6.7
seconds +/- 0.2 seconds. Readjust the vacuum to correct the count time if the time is out
of specification (refer to step 3 of the Vacuum Adjustment (8-inch) procedure previously
discussed).
3. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [RAW DATA].
4. Observe the time displayed for RBC UPTIME. This time represents (T1) which is the
time when the RBC valve 1-2 opens until the meniscus reaches the upper detector.
RBC UPTIME (T1) should be 4.8 to 5.2 seconds. (The time is displayed in milliseconds.)
5. Raise the metering tube to increase the upper time; lower the metering tube to decrease
the upper time. This is necessary when the RBC UPTIME is outside the acceptable
range.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until the RBC Up Time/Count Time is within specification.

WBC Metering System Timing Adjustment
Follow the steps below for adjusting the timing of the WBC metering system:
NOTE: The RBC count times (T1 & T2) must be within specification before performing this procedure.
1. Remove and clean the WBC aperture plate as described in Section 9: Service and
Maintenance, Subsection: Aperture Plates Cleaning of the CELL-DYN 1700
Operations Manual.
2. Run a background count and observe the count time displayed to the right of the WBC
histogram. This time should be 5.0 seconds +/- 1.0 second.
NOTE: There is no count time adjustment procedure. If the count time is out of specification, call the
CELL-DYN Technical Support Center for additional information.
3. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [RAW DATA].
4. Observe the time displayed for WBC UPTIME. This time represents (T1) which is the
time when the WBC valve 4-3 opens until the meniscus reaches the upper detector.
WBC UPTIME (T1) should be 1.8 to 2.2 seconds. See Figure 8-3.
5. If WBC UPTIME is outside the acceptable range, an adjustment will be necessary.
Raise the metering tube to increase the upper time; lower the metering tube to decrease
the upper time.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 until WBC UPTIME/COUNT TIME is within specification.

8.7 24V SWITCHING MODULE ADJUSTMENT
The 24V Switching Module is located next to the fan behind the CRT assembly.
Adjust the regulated +24V supply to 24.5 +/- 0.5V.
Location Function Voltage.
BROWN +24V 25.0V +/- 1.0
NOTE: The 24V Switching Module has only one potentiometer. Adjust the potentiometer with an in-
sulated screwdriver and record the adjustment.
8.8 POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE TEST POINTS
Table 8-2 lists the test points located on the Power Distribution Module (PDM) and Figure 8-4 illus-
trates the test points on the PDM board.
Test Function Range Ripple

Analog
TP1 N/A N/A
Ground
TP2 +12V +12V +/- 0.6V < 100mV
TP3 -12V -12V +/- 0.6V < 100mV
TP4 +24V +25V +/- 1.0V < 100mV
TP5 +5V +5.15V +/- 0.25V < 100mV
Table 8-2: PDM Test Points
• • •
TP4 TP3 TP2
PDM
TP1
• •
TP5 GND
Figure 8-4 PDM Test Points SS00053A

8.9 CABLE DISTRIBUTION MODULE TEST POINTS
Table 8-3 lists the test points located on the Cable Distribution Module (COM).
Location Function Voltage Ripple

(J5 and J8)
Brown Ground < O.05V N/A
Blank N/A N/A N/A
Orange Ground < O.05V N/A
Yellow +12V Unreg. 16.5V +/- 1.0V 3.5V P-P
Green +24V Unreg. 34.5V +/- 2.0V 7V P-P
Blank N/A N/A N/A
Table 8-3: COM Test Points
8.10 SIGNAL PROCESSOR MODULE ADJUSTMENT
The Signal Processor Module (SPM), located in the card cage on the right side of the instrument, con-
tains the circuitry for the RBC and WBC lower fixed discriminators and the lower and upper platelet
discriminators. A discussion of the functions of the SPM can be found in Section 4 of this manual;
however, the only field adjustments recommended on this board are the discriminator voltages.
Follow the steps below to align the SPM:
1. Verify that the instrument is in the READY state.

2. Connect the DVM positive lead to TP1 0 'WBC Discriminator) on the SPM. Connect the
ground lead to TP15.
3. Adjust R44 for 0.15 volts +/- 0.01 volts.
4. Connect positive lead of DVM to TP11 (RBC Discriminator).
6. Connect positive lead of DVM to TP19 (PLT High Discriminator).
8. Connect the positive lead of DVM to TP20 (PLT Low Discriminator).
Table 8-4 contains the specifications for the SPM alignment.
Function Test Adjust Setting/Range

WBC
TP10 R44 0.15V +/- 0.01
DISC.
RBCDISC. TP11 R45 0.35V +/- 0.01
PLTHIGH TP19 R48 3.50V +/- 0.05
PLTLOW TP20 R49 0.20V +/- 0.01
Table 8-4: SPM Alignments
Test points for the SPM are shown in Figure 8-5.

• •
TP3 TP4
J1
0 • • • 0 0 00 •
TP9
TP5
TP1 TP2 SPM
•
TP8
R39 R41 R42 TP19
•
TP18
•• • • TP6
R56
TP7
R40
TP20
• •
TP15
•
TP10 TP11
• 0 0 TP16
TP13
O· •
TP12
• 0 TP14
• R44 R45
TP17
R48 R49
Figure 8-5 SPM Test Points SS00023A

8.11 DEVICE CONTROL MODULE ADJUSTMENT
The Device Control Module (DCM) is located in the main electronics card cage. The DCM has a sin-
gle adjustment that can be performed in the field. The adjustment is for the 0 to A converter output.
No other adjustments are required.
Follow the steps below to align the DCM:
1. Verify the instrument is in the READY state.
2. Connect the DVM positive lead to TP3 on the DCM. Connect the ground lead to TP2
(DAC GND) on the DCM board.
3. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [MORE] three times. Press
[SERVICE DEC CODE], type "2" and press Enter.
5. Press [SERVICE DEC CODE], type "1" and press Enter.
6. Check TP3 for 4.5 volts +/- 0.07 volt.
NOTE: Counterclockwise rotation increases the voltage.

Table 8-5 contains the specifications for the OCM alignment.
Function Test Adjust Setting/Range

OTOA
TP3 R1 9.00 V +/- 0.07
OUTPUT
Table 8-5: OCM Alignment
Test points for the OCM are shown in Figure 8-6.

J1 • 11..-- J_2 _
TP1
•
TP2
R1
oeM
• TP3
• TP4 • TP5 • TP6
Figure 8-6 DeM Test Points SS00024A

8.12 PRE-AMPLIFIER MODULE ADJUSTMENT
The Pre-Amplifier Module (PAM) is located on the upper right corner of the Flow Panel. Hemoglobin
circuitry, and the PLT and WBC aperture currents require verification and/or adjustment on this mod-
ule. The HGB Flow Cell should be cleaned before performing hemoglobin alignments (refer to Sec-
tion 9, Subsection: HGB Flow Cell Manual Cleaning in the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual).
Pre-Amplifier Module (PAM) Test Points

Remove the top cover, upper and lower front covers, bezel, and the Pre-Amp cover plate (refer to the
PAM Removal procedure in Section 7 of this manual).
Table 8-6 lists the test points located on the PAM.
Location Function Voltage

TP5 Analog Ground N/A
J3 PIN 1 +100V +100V +/- 7V
TP6 +15V +15V +/- 0.6V
TP7 -15V -15V +/- 0.6V
Table 8-6: PAM Test Points
Pre-Amplifier Module Adjustment

Test points for the PAM are shown in Figure 8-7. Follow the steps below to align the PAM:
1. Remove the top cover, upper and lower front covers, and bezel (refer to Section 7 of this

manual for removal instructions).
2. Locate the PAM mounted on the upper right corner of the flow panel.
3. Remove the PAM cover (refer to Section 7 for removal instructions).
4. Connect a jumper between pin 5 of J1 and TP5 (Analog Ground). This will extinguish
the HGB LED.
5. Connect the positive lead of DVM to TP2. Connect the ground of DVM to TP5.
6. Adjust R5 (HGB Zero Offset) for 0.000 volts +/- 0.001 volts.
7. Remove the jumper lead and allow a five-minute warm-up period.
8. Press the Touch Plate to cycle the instrument and fill the HGB Flow Cell with fresh
reagent.
9. Measure the voltage at TP2.
10. Adjust R12 (HGB Gain Adjust) for 5.0 volts +/- 0.2 volts.
11. Connect the positive lead of DVM to TP1. Run a background count. Verify 100 volts +/-
2.0 volts.
12. Connect the jumper between TP8 (Aperture Current Jumper) and TP5 (Analog Ground).
13. Disconnect the RBC signal cable from J2.
14. Connect a 20K Ohm 1/4 watt resistor across pins 4 and 5 of J2.
15. Connect the DVM across the resistor.

J1
II J2
I I J3
I J4
I
•
• TP6 +15VDC
TP7 -15V DC
• • •
TP2 TP3 TP4
ANALOG
GROUND
•
TP5
TP8. • TP9
R5
(] R12 K2 K3
(] • TP1 +100V DC
R13
I~I I~l
(] G R21
PAM
R35
Figure 8-7 Pre-Amp Module (PAM) Test Points SS00025A

17. Adjust R21 (PLT aperture current adjust) for 11.0 volts +/- 0.01 volts.
18. Remove the jumper between TP8 and TP5.
19. Remove the resistor and reconnect cable to J2.
20. Disconnect the WBC signal cable from J4.
21. Connect a 15K Ohm 1/4 watt resistor across pins 4 and 5 of J4.
22. Connect the DVM across resistor.
24. Adjust R35 (WBC aperture current adjust) for 12.0 volts +/- 0.01 volts.
25. Remove the jumper between TP8 and TP5.
26. Remove the resistor and reconnect cable to J4.
27. Reinstall the top cover, upper and lower front covers, and bezel.

Table 8-7 contains the specifications for the Pre-Amp Module alignment.
HGBZERO TP2 R5 0.00 V. +/- 0.001

Jumper to Ground
HGBGAIN TP2 R12 5.0 V. +/- 0.2 V.
PLT APER. DUMMY R21 11.0 V. +/- 0.01 V.
CURRENT RESISTOR
WBCAPER. DUMMY R35 12.0 V. +/- 0.01 V.
CURRENT RESISTOR
Table 8-7: Pre-Amp Alignments
8.13 MAIN AMPLIFIER OFFSET and GAIN ADJUSTMENT ALIGNMENT
The Main Amplifier Module (MAM) is located in the main electronics card cage. Alignment of the
WBC, RBC, and PLT gains are critical adjustments that must be verified and/or adjusted before instru-
ment accuracy can be established.
Uniform Latex particles are used to perform these adjustments. The particles must be mixed vigor-
ously before diluting to obtain accurate results.
The Gain and RBC Cell Editing adjustments are performed in the Gain Adjust Mode, which allows
multiple counts to be run on the same sample. When Gain Adjust Mode is entered, whatever is in the
Pre-Mixing Cup is transferred to the WBC Cup and 5 mL of diluent is left undisturbed in the RBC Cup.

When performing RBC or PLT adjustments only, 10 mL of diluent must be placed in Pre-Mixing Cup
before entering Gain Adjust Mode to prevent air from being pulled into the von Behrens WBC Trans-
ducer during a count cycle.
Test points for the MAM are shown in Figure 8-8.
Follow the steps below to align the main amplifier offset and gain adjustment.
WBC Offset
1. Ensure that the instrument is in the READY state.
2. Connect the DVM Pos lead to TP1 O. Connect the ground to TP9.
3. Adjust R1 (WBC ZERO ADJUST) so that the baseline of the noise signal is positioned at
0.000 volts +/- 0.002.
WBC Gain
1. Prepare a WBC latex dilution.
a. Obtain a clean container. From the MAIN Menu, press [SPECIAL PROTOCOLS] fol-
lowed by [MORE] twice to display the [10 mL DISPENSE] key. Press [10 mL DIS-
PENSE] four times to dispense 20 mL of diluent into the container (must press twice to
dispense 10 mL).
b. Add 1 drop of well mixed 5.0 latex particle solution into the 20 mL of diluent and mix
well.
c. Before entering the Gain Adjust mode, use the WBC latex dilution prepared in step
(b) above to fill the Pre-Mixing Cup up to the level of the diluent inlet port.

2. From the main MAIN Menu, press [RUN] followed by [SPECIMEN TYPE] then the # key
to active the Gain Adjust mode. The message <PREPARING FOR GAIN ADJUST.> is
displayed and WBC dilution is transferred to the WBC Mixing Chamber. When the
preparation cycle is complete, the RUN screen is again displayed.
3. Press the Touch Plate to run a cycle.
NOTE: Always return to the RUN screen to run a cycle.

R1 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R11 R71
.0 0 OOOT;.OO 0 00. • 0 •
R15 R16
TP12 TP13
TP10 TP6 TP7 •
TP11
• TP2 R72
•
TP14
• TP1 MAM •
TP15 0
• TP3 • TP4 • TP5
.TP8
• TP16
Figure 8-8 MAM Test Points SS00026A
NOTE: When the procedure is completed, or if there is a need to exit the Gain Adjust Mode while per-
forming this procedure, such as constant clogs or improper dilution ratio, press [SPECIMEN
TYPE] followed by [PATIENT SPECIMEN].

NOTE: The WBC count should be between 10.0 and 30.0. If the count is outside this range, modify
the dilution ratio of the latex particles, exit Gain Adjust Mode and try again.
4. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [MORE].
5. Press [SMOOTHING OFF]. The key changes to [SMOOTHING ON] and is highlighted,
indicating the smoothing function is ON. Press [WBC HISTOGRAM]. Observe the
lower part of the histogram data to determine the channel number for peak of 100. If the
gain is adjusted properly, the peak count of 100 will be in channel 56 +/- 1 channel.
NOTE: Turning R4 clockwise will increase the channel number; turning R4 counterclockwise will de-
crease the channel number.
6. If the peak count of 100 is not within specification, adjust R4. Return to the RUN screen
and run another cycle. Observe the channel number for peak count of 100. If the gain is
still outside of specification, repeat this process until the peak count of 100 is in channel
56 +/- 1 channel. Refer to Figure 8-9.
7. If only WBC Gain is to be checked, exit the Gain Adjust mode, go to the RUN Menu, and
press [SPECIMEN TYPE] followed by [PATIENT SPECIMEN].
RBC Offset
1. Connect a DVM to TP6 (RBC OUT) and the ground to TP9.
2. Adjust R11 (RBC ZERO ADJUST) so that the baseline of the noise signal is positioned
at 0.00 volts +/- 0.002 volts.
3. Connect a DVM to TP13 (RBC DISCRIMINATOR) and the ground to TP9.
4. Adjust R71 (RBC DISC. ADJUST) for 0.40 volts +/- 0.01 volts.
CELL-DYN 1700 SPECIMEN DATA REPORT
Dec 121993
Type: GAIN ADJ Operator I.D.:
I
Approximately 95 II
Sequence# :
wec
wac: 18.2 GIL
LYM: 13.7 R2 75.3 %L
*MID: 4.0 RM 21.8 %M
GRAN: 0.5 R3 2.9 %G 100 200 300 400 450
CD1700 DIAGNOSTIC REPORT
CD 1700 Serial #: Dec 17 1994 11 :38 am
UIS: Version 1.0 Operator 10: -••
Sequence # : 25
wac histogram data smoothing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
33: 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 4 6 9 17 27
49: 40 52 65 76 87 95 99 100 98 96 94 91 87 83 79 74
65: 69 64 58 54 49 46 41 38 35 33 32 30 29 30 30 30
81 : 29 28 26 23 20 16 13 9 7 5 3 3 2 2 2 2
97: 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2
113: 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 1
129: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
145: 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
161 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
177: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
193: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
209: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
225: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
241: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Peak of 100 is at channel 56
Figure 8-9 wac Gain Adjustments

RBC Gain
1. If in the Gain Adjust mode, add 1 drop of well-mixed 5.0 latex particle solution to the 5
mL of diluent already in the RBC Mixing Chamber. Go to step 3.
2. If not in the Gain Adjust mode, do the following:
a. Pour 10 mL of diluent into the Pre-Mixing Cup and add 1 drop of well-mixed 5.0 latex
particle solution to the 5 mL of diluent already in the RBC Mixing Chamber.
b. In the RUN screen, press [SPECIMEN TYPE] then the # key to activate the Gain
Adjust mode. The message <PREPARING FOR GAIN ADJUST.> is displayed and
diluent in the Pre-Mixing Cup is transferred to the WBC Mixing Chamber. When the
NOTE: Always return to the RUN screen to run a cycle.
NOTE: The RBC count should be between 3.00 and 6.00. If the count is outside this range, adjust the
dilution ratio of the latex particles by adding more diluent or latex to the RBC Mixing Chamber.
indicating the smoothing function is ON. Press [RBC HISTOGRAM]. Observe the lower
part of the histogram data to determine the channel number for peak of 100. If the gain
is adjusted properly, the peak count of 100 will be in channel 98 +/- 2 channels. Refer to
Figure 8-10.
to run another cycle. Observe the channel number for peak count of 100. If the gain is
still outside of specification, repeat this process until the peak count of 100 is in channel
98 +/- 2 channels.
7. Leave SMOOTHING ON.
8. From the RBC HISTOGRAM screen, press [MORE] twice followed by [SERVICE DEC
CODE]. Type in "101" and press Enter to view High Current Histogram. The Peak
(Mode) should be in channel 98 +/- 2 channels.
9. If the peak count of 100 is within specification, this procedure is completed.
and run another cycle. Repeat steps 4 through 8.

CELL-DYN 1700 SPECIMEN DATA REPORT
Dec 121993
Operator I.D.:
Type: GAIN ADJ
Sequence# :
Approximately 98 fl
RBC
RBC: 5.09 M/uL
HGB: »» g/dL
HCT: 47.3 %
MCV: 93. fL
MCH: pg
MCHC: g/dL 50 100 150 200 250
RDW: 9.3 %
CO 1700 Diagnostics Report
CD 1700 Serial #: Dec 17 1994 11 :38 am
UIS: Version 1.0 Operator 10: 999
Sequence #: 68
RBC low current histogram data smoothing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1: 0 0 0 a 0 0 a a a 0 0 0 a 0 a 1
17: 1 2 3 4 6 9 13 18 21 23 24 25 24 22 19 13
33: 10 7 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
49: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
65: a a 0 0 a a a 0 a 0 a 1 1 1 1 1
81 : 1 2 3 3 5 7 10 13 18 26 36 48 60 73 81 91
97: 98 100 99 96 91 83 78 71 66 60 55 49 45 43 40 37
113: 35 33 30 28 25 22 18 14 11 7 5 3 2 2 2 1
129: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 a 0 0 a
145: 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 a a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
161 : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
177: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
193: 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
209: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
225: 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
241: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 a 0 a 0 0 a 0 0
Figure 8-10 RBC Gain Adjustments

RER Adjustment
1. If in the Gain Adjust mode, add 1 drop of well-mixed 5.0 latex particle solution to the 5
mL of diluent already in the RBC Mixing Chamber. Go to step 3.
a. Pour 10 mL of diluent into the Pre-Mixing Cup and add 1 drop of well-mixed 5.0 latex
particle solution to the 5 mL of diluent already in the RBC Mixing Chamber.
b. In the RUN screen, press [SPECIMEN TYPE] then the # key to active the Gain
3. Press the Touch Plate to run a cycle. Make a note of the RBC results.
NOTE: The RBC count should be between 3.00 and 6.00. If the count is outside this range, adjust the
dilution ratio of the latex particles by adding more diluent or latex to the RBC Mixing Chamber.
4. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above two more times for a total of 3 runs. Calculate the average
of the three RBC counts.
5. Refer to Figure 8-11, the Cell Edit Chart, to find the target value for the following:
a. Use the average RBC count calculated in step 4 above to determine the Edit Ratio Per-
centage that coincides with the calculated average.
NOTE: Example: A count of 4 million intersects the curve at an edit ratio of 28.2%.
6. Use the edit ratio calculated in step 5a to perform the following procedure:

a. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [RAW DATA].
b. Observe the RBC RER displayed on the screen from the last cycle. It should be
within +/- 1% of the calculated value from step 4a.
Using Figure 8-11 as an example, an edit ratio of 270/0 can be between 26 and 28 percent.
NOTE: Clockwise adjustment of R72 increases the percentage.
c. If the RBC Editing Ratio is out-of-range, adjust R72. Return to the MAIN Menu and
run another cycle. Observe the RER in the RAW DATA screen. If the ratio is still
outside of specification, repeat this process until the RBC Editing Ratio is within +/-
1% of your calculated value.

'--
'-- 5.0 LATEX APERTURE SIZE - 60 MICRON OIA.
f.----
33
I ~ ....~""
~
~
~
32 I~
~
.~
.........
..... ~
31 ~
1.01III"'"
~
~
-
~
30
~
~
...... II""'"
--
0 ~
~ 29
~
.............. II""'"
I- ~
~
Cl
w 28 ...
..... II""'"
~
IiIll"""
1.01III"'"
l..llllII""
27
.,
~
~
~
II
26 ~
... ~
LI
25 I--
I---
I---
RBC COUNT IN MILLIONS PER MICROLITER
I I
3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
Figure 8-11 Cell Edit Chart SSOOO27A

d. Return to the MAIN Menu and press [RUN] to access the RUN screen. Observe the
RBC Histogram. The trailing edge should be straight with almost no humps. Refer to
Figure 8-12.
PLT Offset
1. Connect a DVM to TP7 (PLT OUT) and ground to TP9.
2. Adjust R16 (PLT ZERO ADJUST) so that the baseline of the noise signal is positioned at
0.00 volts +/- 0.002 volts.
PLT Gain
1. If in the Gain Adjust mode, prepare a PLT latex dilution by following the steps below:
a. From the MAIN Menu, press [SPECIAL PROTOCOLS] followed by [MORE] twice.
Place a clean container under the Sample Probe and press [10 mL DISPENSE] four
times to dispense 20 mL of diluent (must press twice to dispense 10 mL).
b. Add one (1) drop of well-mixed 3.31 latex particle solution and mix well.
c. Hold the diluted latex solution under the Sample Probe and press [1/50 DILUTION] to
dispense a second dilution.
d. Place a clean container under the Sample Probe and press [1/50 DILUTION] to
aspirate the second dilution.
e. Pull open solenoid 2-5 to drain the existing solution in the RBC Mixing Chamber.
f. Pour the second latex solution into RBC Mixing Chamber.

g. Go to step 3.
a. Pour 10 mL of diluent into the Pre-Mixing Cup (do not add any latex particle solution).
b. In the RUN screen, press [SPECIMEN TYPE] then the # key to active the Gain
NOTE: When running PLT counts, the lower front cover must be on the instrument to prevent noise
from interfering with PLT results.
NOTE: The PLT count should be between 200 and 700. If the count is outside this range, adjust the
dilution ratio of the latex particles by adding more dilution or latex.

CD1700 Diagnostic Report
CD1700 Serial III Jun 21 1993 11.38 am

UIS. Version 0.01 PROTO Operator I.D.: 999
sequence' • 68
CD1700 Test Data
WBC count: 3328

RBC Count. 27904 RBC RBR. Not calculable
PLT Count • 512
Hgb Error • 2
Hgb Reference. 4095
Hgb Sample. 2447
WBC up time. 2162 WBC Upper ~. 2162 WBC Upper mln.2l34
NBC Cnt time. 4858 WBC Upper DIX. 524S NBC Upper min.486l
RBC Up time. 5182 RBC Upper DIX. 5354 RBC uPper min.S131
RBC up time. 6694 RBC upper DlXI 7040 RBC Upper mln1670?
Flow Error. 0000
UIS. Version 0.01 PROTO Pile date code: 1993-5-10 22.5

CCM ROM Version. 3 VO.Ol 03-04-93 CD1700
MPM ROM Version. Vl.l 05-05-91
DOS Version: 5.0
BIOS Version. 07/07/91
RBC: 4.53 M1uL
HGB: >>>> g/dL
RBe
HCT: .453 %
MCV: 100. fL Invalid Cells
MCH: pg
MCHC: g/dL
ROW: 5.2 %
50 100 150 200 250
RBC: 4.59 M/uL
HGB: »» g/dL RBC
HCT: .436 %
MCV: 95. fL Proper Editing
MCH: pg
MCHC: g/dL
ROW: 5.2 %
50 100 150 200 250
Figure 8-12 Editing Ratio Displays

indicating the smoothing function is ON. Press [PLT HISTOGRAM]. Observe the lower
part of the histogram data to determine the channel number for peak of 100. If the gain
is adjusted properly, the peak count of 100 will be in channel 136 +/- 1 channel. Refer to
Figure 8-13.
6. If the peak count of 100 is within specification, this procedure is completed.
7. If the peak count of 100 is not within specification, adjust R15. Return to the RUN
screen and run another cycle. Repeat steps 4 and 5.
8. To exit Gain Adjust mode, go to the RUN Menu and press [SPECIMEN TYPE] followed
by [PATIENT SPECIMEN].
9. Press [MAIN] to return to the MAIN Menu. Press [SPECIAL PROTOCOLS] followed by
[REAGENT PRIME].
8.14 DILUENT AND SAMPLE VERIFICATION/ADJUSTMENT
To minimize problems like coincidence passage, the CELL-DYN 1700 uses two different dilution
ratios of whole blood to diluent. The ratio for WBC/HGB is 1:285; the ratio for RBC/MCV/PLT is
1:12,801. The following procedure will be used to verify the diluent dispense to maintain proper dilu-
tion ratios and thereby optimize instrument performance.

Diluent Volume Verification
Follow the steps below for verifying diluent volume:
1. From the MAIN Menu, press [SPECIAL PROTOCOLS] followed by [MORE] twice.
2. Place an empty 10 mL graduated cylinder under the Sample Probe and press [10 mL
DISPENSE] twice to dispense 10 mL of diluent.
3. Verify a volume of 10 mL +/- 0.2 mL.
4. Place an empty 10 mL graduated cylinder under Sample Probe and press [1/50
DILUTION]. Once the probe has returned to the aspirate position, press [1/50
DISPENSE] to dispense.
5. Verify a volume of 5 mL +/- 0.1 mL.
NOTE: The volume dispensed is under direct computer control. If the volume is out-of-range, the Dis-
penser and Stepper Motor drive circuitry must be repaired.

Approximately 18 fl
PLT: 540. Klul

PLT
2 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
CD1700 DIAGNOSTIC REPORT
CD1700 Serial #: Dec 17 1994 11:38am

UIS: Version 1.0 Operator 10: ---
Sequence # : 57
PLT histogra~data smoothing
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
17: 0 0 0 0 6 6 6 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 4
33: 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
49: 2 3 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
65: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5
81 : 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 12
97: 13 14 14 15 15 16 17 18 19 19 19 20 22 24 25 27
113: 28 29 31 32 33 36 38 42 46 51 55 59 63 69 71 76
129: 79 84 87 91 93 95 98 .l.QQ 98 99 96 95 93 91 88 87
145: 84 83 79 76 74 68 63 61 58 56 52 50 48 46 43 42
161 : 40 39 38 37 36 36 34 34 34 35 34 33 32 32 30 29
177: 27 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 9 8 6 5 5 4
193: 4 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
209: 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 3
225: 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5
241 : 5 5 5 5 5 6 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Figure 8-13 PLT Gain Adjustments

Sample Volume Verification
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. Consider all specimens

potentially infectious. Wear gloves, lab coats, and safety glasses
and follow other biosafety procedures as specified in the OSHA
Bloodborne Rule (29 CFR 1910.1030) or other equivalent bio-
safety procedures. Also, the sample probe is sharp and poten-
tially contaminated with infectious material. Avoid any contact
with the probe.
1. Remove the 1/32" silicone tubing attached to the top of the Sample Probe.
2. Attach a 100 microliter pipette to the silicone tubing.
3. Place the tip of the pipette on the bottom of a small container and press [10 mL
DISPENSE] twice.
NOTE: Keep the tip of the pipette submerged when dispensing.
4. Take the pipette out of the container and wipe any drop from the end of the pipette,
being careful not to wick any liquid from the end.
5. Press [1/50 DILUTION].
6. Verify that the column of liquid is no more than 1/16 inch above or below 100 microliter
mark on the pipette.
7. Replace the 100 microliter pipette with a 40 microliter pipette.
8. Place the tip of the 40 microliter pipette on the bottom of a small container and press [1/

50 DISPENSE].
9. Take the pipette out of the container and wipe any drop from the end of the pipette,
being careful not to wick any liquid from the end.
10. Press [1/250 DILUTION].
11. Verify that the column of liquid is no more than 1/16" above or below 40 microliter mark
on the pipette.
12. Place a waste container under the tip of the pipette and press [1/250 DISPENSE].
13. Remove the pipette and re-attach the silicone tubing to the Sample Probe.
NOTE: The volume aspirated is under direct computer control. If the volume is out-of-range, the Sam-
ple Syringe and Stepper Motor drive must be repaired.
8.15 SAMPLE PROBE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
WARNING: Potential Biohazard. The sample probe

is sharp and potentially contaminated with infectious
material. Avoid any contact with the probe.
The following procedures provide step-by-step instructions to correctly adjust the positions of
Microswitches 1 through 4 on the probe assembly and to correctly align the Sample Probe height.

If a complete alignment is to be done, the procedures should be performed in the following order:
1. Stepper Power Test and Verification
2. Lower Microswitch #1 Adjustment
3. Upper Microswitch #2 Adjustment
4. Left Microswitch #3 Adjustment
5. Right Microswitch #4 Adjustment
6. Sample Probe Height Adjustment
If the procedures are performed sequentially, the instrument need not be "Initialized" after each proce-
dure.
The procedures can also be used for verification of position. When performing verification, skip all
steps calling for loosening screws and moving assemblies.
Stepper Motor Power Test and Verification

1. 1. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [MORE] three times. Then
press [SERVICE DEC CODE].
2. 2. Type in "128" from the keyboard and press Enter.
3. 3. The test will run for approximately 45 seconds.
4. 4. When the test is complete, the results will be displayed on the screen.
5. 5. Compare the results displayed on the screen with the nominal values

.--------------- ------------

listed in Table 5-3 in Section 5 of this manual. Ensure that all values fall within the
specified ranges.
NOTE: Sample Probe motors B (#2) and C (#3) should be within specifications before continuing this
procedure.
Lower Microswitch #1 Adjustment

1. Locate connector J20 on the COM board.
2. Slide the connector back to slightly expose pins.
3. Connect the DVM leads to pins 2 & 3 (orange/red wires).
4. Ensure the cable is still in contact by toggling the switch off/on. (Deactivated =5.00 V;
Activated =0.00 V.)
5. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [MORE] three times. Then
press [SERVICE DEC CODE]. Type in "129" and press Enter.
NOTE: Screen will give a prompt for each entry. The Enter key must be pressed after each number
is entered.
6. Select motor 2 and press Enter. Set "Run" to 1 and press Enter. Set "Idle" to 1 and
press Enter.
7. Press Enter to exit test procedure.
8. Ignore the <INITIALIZE> message, press [SERVICE DEC CODE], type in "130", and
press Enter.
9. Select motor 2, set direction to 0, set speed to 6, and move up 800 steps.
11. Loosen both Locking Screws on Microswitch Assembly #1 then move the assembly to
the lowest position.
12. Select motor 2, set direction to 1, set speed to 6, and move down 813 steps.
13. Move Microswitch Assembly up until it just activates.
14. Level Microswitch Assembly, ensure switch is activated, and tighten Locking Screws.
16. Verify that the switch is de-activated. If not, select motor 2, set direction to 1, set speed
to 8, move down 8 steps, and re-adjust the switch position as described in step 13.
17. Repeat steps 13 through 16 until switch is activated in step 13 and de-activated in step
16.
19. Remove the DVM from connector J20. Press Enter to exit this test procedure.
20. Re-initialize the instrument by turning power OFF then ON.
Upper Microswitch #2 Adjustment

1. Locate connector J21 on the CDM board.
3. Connect DVM leads to pins 2 & 3 (orange/red wires).

4. Ensure the cable is still in contact by toggling switch off/on. (Deactivated =5.00 V;
Activated =0.00 V.)
press Enter.
8. Ignore the <INITIALIZE> message and press [SERVICE DEC CODE]. Type in "130"
and press Enter.
NOTE: The screen will prompt for each entry. The Enter key must be pressed after each number is
entered.
9. Loosen both Locking Screws on Microswitch Assembly #2 and move the assembly to the
highest position and secure.
13. Loosen both Locking Screws on Microswitch Assembly #2 and move the assembly down
until it just activates.
14. Level Microswitch Assembly #2, ensure the switch is activated, and tighten Locking
Screws.

16. Verify that the switch is de-activated. If not, select motor 2, set direction to 0, set speed
to 8, move up 8 steps and re-adjust switch position as described in step 13.
16.
20. Re-initialize instrument by turning power OFF then ON.
Left Microswitch #3 Adjustment

3. Connect DVM leads to pins 2 & 3 (orange/red wires).
4. Ensure the cable is still in contact by toggling switch off/on. (Deactivated =5.00 V;
Activated =0.00 V.)
entered.

press Enter.
8. Ignore the <INITIALIZE> message and press [SERVICE DEC CODE]. Type in "130"
and press Enter.
9. Select motor 2, set direction to 0, set speed to 6 and move up 826 steps.
10. Loosen both Locking Screws on Microswitch Assembly #3 and move the assembly to
rearmost position.
11. Select motor 3, set direction to 0, set speed to 6 and move CCW 245 steps.
12. Select motor 3, set direction to 0, set speed to 8, and move CCW 12 steps.
13. Select motor 3, set direction to 1, set speed to 6, and move CW 240 steps.
14. Move Microswitch Assembly forward until it just activates.
15. Level Microswitch Assembly, ensure switch is activated, and tighten Locking Screws.
17. Verify the switch is de-activated. If not, select motor 3, set direction to 1, set speed to 8,
move CW 2 steps, and re-adjust switch position as described in step 14.
17.

22. Re-initialize the instrument by turning power OFF then ON.
Right Microswitch #4 Adjustment

3. Connect the DVM leads to pins 2 & 3 (orange/red wires).
4. Ensure cable is still in contact by toggling switch off/on.
(Deactivated =5.00 V; Activated =0.00 V.)
entered.
press Enter.
9. Ignore the <INITIALIZE> message and press [SERVICE DEC CODE], type in "130" and
press Enter.

11. Loosen both Locking Screws on Microswitch Assembly #4 and move the assembly to
rearmost position.
15. Move the Microswitch Assembly forward until it just activates.
16. Level Microswitch Assembly, ensure the switch is activated, and tighten the Locking
Screws.
18. Verify switch is de-activated. If not, select motor 3, set direction to 0, set speed to 8,
move CCW 2 steps, and readjust switch position as described in step 14.
17.
23. Re-initialize the instrument by turning the power OFF then ON.

8.16 DILUENT SYRINGE CALIBRATION BLOCK ADJUSTMENT
If the diluent syringe needs to be replaced, the calibration block must be removed from the old syringe
and placed on the new syringe. Follow the instructions below for removing and installing the calibra-
tion block on the syringe. Figure 8-14 illustrates the diluent syringe.
NOTE: Refer to Section 9, Subsection: Diluent Syringe Cleaning in the CELL-DYN 1700 Opera-
tions Manual for detailed instructions on removing and replacing the diluent syringe.
1. Remove the diluent syringe from the instrument as described in the CELL-DYN 1700
Operations Manual.
2. Remove the calibration block from the old syringe using a 7/64" Allen wrench.
3. Install the new syringe in its luer lock fitting.
4. Slide the calibration block onto the plunger rod of the new syringe, then press [SYRINGE
UP] to move the drive ring up. The calibration block should be resting on top of the ring.
5. Reinstall the front section of the syringe holding clamp. Secure it with the clamp nuts
removed during the syringe removal procedure (refer to step 1). Install the clamp nuts
with the larger hole facing the screw. Tighten the clamp nuts finger-tight with the
beveled edge toward the holding clamp. Do not overtighten.

o
::0
<
m
z
c
en
en
8
lG
~

6. Adjust the position of the plunger so that the white plunger head is slightly below the top
of the glass barrel (leave a gap of 1 division, marked on the syringe barrel, or
approximately 200
7. With the calibration block resting on the ring, tighten the Allen screw so that the
calibration block is firmly secured to the rod.
8. Install the drive nut with the spacer (long narrow end) facing up. Tighten the drive nut to
finger-tight while holding the calibration block. Do not over-tighten.
9. Press [RESTORE SYRINGE].
NOTE: Bubbles may be present during the first filling. If they do not disappear, press [MORE] twice,
then press [REAGENT PRIME] to clear the bubbles.
10. Press [MAIN] to return to the MAIN Menu.
11. Press [RUN] followed by [SPECIMEN TYPE] and [NORMAL BACKGROUND]. Using
the Touch Plate, run two to three background counts. Watch the syringe action to make
sure it fills and dispenses completely. Run background counts until acceptable results
are obtained for all background parameters.
12. Confirm calibration by running controls before running patient samples.
13. Record this procedure in the laboratory's maintenance log.

8.17 SHORT SAMPLE SENSOR (1700CS) ADJUSTMENT
Perform the following procedure to adjust the Short Sample Sensor on the Closed Sample Assembly:
1. Obtain a new vial of CELL-DYN 16 Low Control.
2. Using CELL-DYN diluent, dilute the Low Control to obtain a reading of 0.8 MIL +1- 0.08
for RBC on the Final Function Test reference instrument.
NOTE: Always use CELL-DYN diluent for sample dilution and always use the diluted solution the same
day. Do not allow the diluted solution to sit overnight.
3. Hook the positive probe of the DVM to TP4 and the negative probe of the DVM to TP3
(ground of the Blood Sensor printed circuit board #9601165 located inside the Closed
Sample Assembly).
4. From the MAIN Menu, press [DIAGNOSTICS] followed by [MORE] three times then
[SERVICE DEC CODE]. The message <ENTER NUMBER (CURRENTLY, XXX):> will
be displayed on the screen.
5. Place a well-mixed VACUTAINER® of sample in the tube holder well (cap facing down)
and snap the tube in place. Type "33" and press Enter.
6. When the flow sequence is completed, adjust R1 and set the voltage of TP4 to 2.5V +1-
0.1V.
7. Measure the voltage of TP1.
8. If the voltage is within the range of 0.3V - 3.25V, press [SERVICE DEC CODE] again.
The message <ENTER NUMBER (CURRENTLY, 33):> will be displayed on the screen.

Type "34" and press Enter. The instrument will return to normal. This completes the
Closed Mode Short Sample Sensor Adjustment procedure.
9. If the voltage is outside the range of O.3V - 3.25V, do the following:
a. Press [SERVICE DEC CODE]. The message <ENTER NUMBER (CURRENTLY, 33):>
will be displayed on the screen. Type "34" and press Enter.
b. Replace the black sensor block.
c. Press [SERVICE DEC CODE], type "33" and press Enter.
d. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until the voltage is within range.

~endixA
PLANNED MAINTENANCE
SECTION OVERVIEW
The Planned Maintenance Checklist for the CELL-DYN 1700 is available to the Field Service Repre-
sentative on the lap-top computer assigned to the representative and is also available from the Tech-
nical Services Group.
Future revisions of the Planned Maintenance Checklist will be released as Technical Service Bulle-
tins.
CELL-DYN® 1700·Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 A-1

~endixB
CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
Table of Contents
B.1 SECTION OVERVIEW
B.2 CLOSED SAMPLE DESCRIPTION
Detection of Closed Sample Capability
Detection of Short Sample (Insufficient Aspiration)
Setting Open, Closed, and Pre-Dilute Calibration Factors
Using Count Test Function in the Closed Mode
Auto Clean Function
Clean Sampler Function
B.3 CLOSED SAMPLE MODULE CONFIGURATION
B.4 CLOSED SAMPLE ASSEMBLY FUNCTIONAL SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
B.5 CLOSED SAMPLE MODULE TROUBLESHOOTING
Service DEC Codes
Motor Power Test (Service DEC Code 128)
Motor Exercise Test (Service DEC Code 130)
List of Figures
Figure 1 Ready Mode
Figure 2 VACUTAINER@ Vent
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 B-1
~endix B _ _ CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
Figure 3 VACUTAINER~ Aspiration :...----------------
Figure 4 Continued VACUTAINER@ Aspiration
Figure 5 VACUTAINER@ Aspiration Completed
Figure 6 Sample Presentation
Figure 7 Sample Drain
Figure 8 Sample Transfer Cup Soak
Figure 9 Sample Transfer Cup Rinse
Figure 10 Sample Transfer Cup Rinse Complete
Figure 11 System Rinse
Figure 12 Diluent Tubing Air Gap
Figure 13 System Rinse Completed

~endixB ¥ CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
B.1 SECTION OVERVIEW
This appendix is designed to aid the Field Service Representative (FSR) in the troubleshooting and
repair of the CEll-DYN 1700CS Closed Sample assembly. Before attempting any repair of the
Closed Sample assembly, the FSR should verify that the instrument is operating properly in the Open
mode and that the problem is being caused by a malfunction in the Closed Sample assembly.
When a closed VACUTAINER® is inserted (cap facing down) into the VACUTAINER® holder well
and the Touch Plate on the Closed Sample Assembly is pressed, the instrument aspirates 450 Jll of
sample. The Closed Sample cycle performs the following four major functions:
1. Diluent residue rinse (from the previous cycle)
2. Sample presentation and aspiration
3. Sample transfer cup soak and rinse
4. Needle waste well rinse
A detailed description of the steps in each of these functions is given in Section B.4.
B.2 CLOSED SAMPLE DESCRIPTION
Detection of Closed Sample Capability

When the instrument is turned on, the initialization of the UIC (User Interface Computer) software
determines whether the instrument is a CEll-DYN 1700 or CEll-DYN 1700CS (this differs from the
CEll-DYN 1600 which uses a code in the CCM).

~endix 8 ..... _ CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
The instrument model is determined by a code stored in the start-up file on the hard disk. When the
software is installed at the factory or updated in the field, this code enables/disables the Closed Sam-
ple Assembly and all its ancillary support.
Detection of Short Sample (Insufficient Aspiration)

The CELL-DYN 1700CS uses a photo-detector as a short sample sensor. If the sample arrives at the
sensor too late or if an air bubble is in the line, a warning is displayed on the CRT.
Setting Open, Closed, and Pre-Dilute Calibration Factors

There are six calibration factors - WBC, RBC, HGB, MCV, PLT, and MPV - for each of the three
calibration modes, Open, Closed, and Pre-Dilute. The calibration factors for the Open mode are set
first. The Closed Mode is then calibrated against the Open mode. Calibration factors for the Pre-
Dilute mode are set separately. For specific instructions on calibrating the Open, Closed, and Pre-
Dilute modes, refer to the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual.
Either the Open or Closed mode factors can be viewed by pressing the [OPEN/CLOSED FACTORS]
key in the CALIBRATION Menu. The Pre-Dilute factors can be viewed by pressing the [PRE-
DILUTE] key in the CALIBRATION Menu.
The software automatically puts specimen results in either the Open or Pre-Dilute factors category,
depending on which method has been selected, when the operator presses the Open mode Touch
Plate. The software automatically puts specimen results in the Closed factors category when the
operator presses the Closed Sample Touch Plate.

Display/Printout of Aspiration Method Used on Last Sample
The CELL-DYN 1700CS can accept blood samples in three ways: 1) Open mode, 2) Closed mode,
and 3) Pre-Dilute mode. In the RUN Menu, when sample results run in the Closed mode are dis-
played on the screen, the message <CLOSED> is displayed in the upper right corner after the
Sequence # field. For Pre-Diluted samples, the message <PRE-DILUTE MODE> is displayed on the
screen. No message is displayed for Open mode.
In the DATA LOG Menu or QUALITY CONTROL Menu, the letter "0", "C" or "P" is used to designate
which method was used for each sample in the Data Log or Quality Control Log. The letter is located
in a field preceding the Date field on the right side of the display screen.
Using Count Test Function in the Closed Mode

To run a Count Test in the Closed mode, first press the [COUNT TEST] key in the DIAGNOSTICS
Menu, then press the Touch Plate on the Closed Sample Assembly.
Auto Clean Function

On the CELL-DYN 1700CS, when the [AUTO CLEAN] key in the SPECIAL PROTOCOLS Menu is
pressed, the following message is displayed on the screen:

~endix B _ _ CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
<Please place tube containing Enzyme Cleaner in closed sampler
Then press the START CLEAN key
Otherwise press the asterisk (*) key to cancel this procedure.>
Refer to the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual for instructions on performing the Auto Clean Proce-
dure.
Clean Sampler Function

On the CELL-DYN 1700CS, when the [CLEAN SAMPLER] and [START CLEAN] keys in the SPE-
CIAL PROTOCOLS Menu are pressed, the Closed Sample system is drained and refilled after the
tube holder well has been manually cleaned.
Refer to the CELL-DYN 1700 Operations Manual for instructions on performing the Clean Sampler
Procedure.
B.3 CLOSED SAMPLE MODULE CONFIGURATION
The Closed Sample Module includes the following major assemblies. Refer to schematic #9480081 in
Section 6.
1. Needle Drive Assembly, Needle Drive Motor, and Stepper Driver printed circuit board
2. Sample Pump Motor and Stepper Driver printed circuit board
3. Diluent Pump Motor and Stepper Driver printed circuit board
4. Sample Transfer Cup
5. Sample Detector

B.4 CLOSED SAMPLE ASSEMBLY FUNCTIONAL SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION
The following is a description of the functions performed by the Closed Sample Assembly during a
sample cycle. The sequence begins when the instrument is in the READY mode and the Touch Plate
is pressed. The sequence ends when the instrument returns to the READY state.
Legend:
The normal solid line for the tubing indicates the Closed Sample Assembly is in the READY state.
The heavy solid line for the tubing indicates the line is filled with liquid during the closed sample cycle.
The dashed line for the tubing indicates the line contains residue during the closed sample cycle.

T
Probe
~~ Sample Transfer Cup

Vacutainer
Needle Waste
Down
Waste
...........jl----.....- - - -.. Diluent
a o
Sample Diluent
Peristaltic Peristaltic
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 1 Ready Mode
SS00037A

~endix 8 _ _ CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
2. When the Touch Plate is pressed, the needle moves up 610 steps to pierce the
VACUTAINER® cap. The top hole in the needle is positioned inside the
VACUTAINER® and the bottom hole is positioned below the VACUTAINER® cap,
allowing the VACUTAINER® to return to atmospheric pressure. Refer to Figure 2.
T
Probe
Sample Transfer Cup

Vacutainer
Needle Waste
in Vent
Position Waste
..... .....---+-----..
~ Diluent
a o
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 2 Vacutainer Vent
SS00038A

T
Probe
Vacutainer Sample Transfer Cup
Needle in Waste
Aspiration
Position Waste
....--tl-----+----~Diluent
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 3 Vacutainer Aspiration
SS00039A

T
Probe
...---- Sample Transfer Cup

Vacutainer
Waste
Waste
..... .....---+---....... Diluent

~
Sample
o
Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 4 Continued Vacutainer Aspiration
SS00040A

u-+---. Sample Transfer Cup j
Vacutainer
~
I
I
I
I
- - - -- - -- -J
Waste
Waste
..... .....----+----.......
~ Diluent
Sample
o
Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 5 Vacutainer Aspiration Completed
SS00041A

~endix 8 L"; -5 ,S • •"7 __ I
F CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
6. The Sample Pump turns counterclockwise to transfer most of the remaining sample (190
J.1L) in the tubing into the Sample Transfer Cup. The Sample Probe then aspirates 30 J.1L
from the cup and moves back up. From this point, the instrument performs the same
sample cycle as in the Open mode. Refer to Figure 6.
w-I--... Sample Transfer Cup j

Vacutainer
~
I
I
I I
I I
Needle
Down - - - - - - - Waste
Waste
- -- -J
I .....~Ioo----.....- - - -.. Diluent
~
_r'"
0
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 6 Sample Presentation
SS00042A

T Probe
Sample Transfer Cup

Vacutainer
I
I
I I
- - - - - - - Waste
Waste
- - -
I .....- ......--.....p.---......... Diluent
~
_r'
0
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 7 Sample Drain
SS00043A

T Probe
Vacutainer
Sample Transfer Cup i
28 ~
1
1
1 1
1
Needle
Down - - - - -- - 1 Waste
Waste
- -- _I
1 .--..... --_I-----~ Diluent
0
_r-
~
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 8 Sample Transfer Cup Soak
SS00044A

~endix 8 52:. _... CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
9. At the end of the soak cycle, solenoid 3-8 opens to rinse the diluent from the cup to the
waste system, and the Diluent Pump turns on counterclockwise to aspirate diluent into
the Sample Transfer Cup, creating a diluent rinsing action through the cup and waste
tubing. Sample residue remains in the tubing from the needle to the cup. Refer to
Figure 9.
T
Probe
Sample Transfer Cup

Vacutainer
38
I
I
Needle I Waste
Down
Waste
I ..........j.....- -.....- - -......~ Diluent
o
_r
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 9 Sample Transfer Cup Rinse
SS00045A

~endix 8 .1._ -__ % CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
10. With solenoid 3-8 still open, the Diluent Pump turns off, allowing diluent in the Sample
Transfer Cup and tubing to be drained to the waste system. Diluent residue remains in
the tubing from the cup to solenoid 3-8. The cup rinse procedure is now completed.
Refer to Figure 10.
T Probe
------ Sample Transfer Cup !

o
Vacutainer
Short Sample Detector

0- 1 I
I I~BIOOd
I Residue
I I
- -1-
Waste
Waste
- - -- _I
Blood ~
Residue/" .. .....- .... ----l~---~ Diluent
O~
--
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 10 Sample Transfer Cup Rinse Completed
SS00046A

11.
T
Probe
Sample Transfer Cup

Vacutainer
28
Waste Waste
Well
Waste
....~t------+----.......~ Diluent
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 11 System Rinse
SS00047A

12.
Vacutainer
T
Probe
~...."Sample Transfer Cup
~Air Gap
Short
Sample
Detector
Waste
Waste
....-+----+0----..... Diluent
~ [])
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 12 Diluent Tubing Air Gap
SS00048A

~endix 8 _ _ CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
13. The Sample Pump reverses direction and turns counterclockwise to transfer diluent from
the needle line to the Sample Transfer Cup. Simultaneously, solenoid 3-8 opens to drain
the diluent in the cup to the waste system This completes the Closed Sample cycle.
Refer to Figure 13.
T
Probe
Sample Transfer Cup

Vacutainer
Waste
Waste
.--....--_1----- Diluent
Sample Diluent
Pump Pump
Piercing
Stepper
Figure 13 System Rinse Completed
SS00049A

Service DEC Codes

The following two Service DEC Codes are unique to the Closed Sample assembly:
1. Service DEC Code "72" moves the sample probe into the Sample Transfer Cup, allowing
visual verification of the Sample Probe alignment in relationship to the Sample Transfer
Cup.
2. Service DEC Code "73" moves the Sample Probe back to its READY position.
Motor Power Test (Service DEC Code 128)

The Motor Power Test can be used to test the stepper motor circuitry in the Closed Sample assembly.
The specifications for motors J, K, and L are:
LOW MEDIUM HIGH PHASE
1.6 - 2.4 3.44 - 5.16 4.88 - 7.32 4.88 - 7.32
Motor Exercise Test (Service DEC Code 130)

Service DEC Code "130" can be used to exercise motors J, K, and L. The direction and speed com-
mands for these motors are:
J/10 Needle 1 Up/Pierce
o DownlWithdraw

~endixB CLOSED SAMPLE OPTION
K/11
o
L/12 Diluent 1
o

~endixC
CELL-DYN 1700 SYSTEM INTERFACE SPECIFICATION
C.1 SECTION OVERVIEW
The CELL-DYN 1700 Instrument System Interface Specification is contained in this section. It is a
separate document published by Abbot Diagnostics. It is included in this manual to assist Field Ser-
vice Representatives in answering questions and resolving problems related to the interface of the
system to an external computer.
SYSTEM INTERFACE SPECIFICATION
CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 C-1

• CELL-DYN 1700 System
BookTOC
• TOC (Table of Contents)
Inte ace pecification

CELL- YN ® 1700 S STEM
List Number 04H03-01
REVISION A
Abbott Laboratories ©1995, Abbott Diagnostics

Abbott Park, IL 60064 Abbott Diagnostics is a wholly owned
04H03-01A - February 1995 subsidiary of Abbott Laboratories
Table of Contents
1.0 Introduction
2.0 Mechanical Interface
3.0 Electrical Interface
4.0 Data Interface
5.0 Communication Protocol
6.0 Identification (ID) Segment
7.0 Results Segment
Table 1 Histogram Messages
Table 2 Histogram Record Dump
Table 3 Count Data Messages
Table 4 Count Record Dump
Histogram Message Example
Count Data Message Example
Interface Specification CELL-DYM® 1700 System 04H03-01A-February1995 1

1.0 Introduction
1.1 Purpose
This document describes the interfacing characteristics of the Abbott CELL-DYN® 1700
automated hematology analyzer when attached to a Host.
1.2 Definitions and Conventions
Host: external computer or data collection system.

CELL-DYN 1700: Abbott CELL-DYN 1700 or 1700CS.
This specification follows guidelines adopted at the Biomedical Instrumentation Interface
Standards Conference held at the University of Florida in December 1980 and at the
University of Texas in Dallas, April 1981.
Signal designators and related characteristics follow EIA Standard RS232C as summa-
rized in "The Handbook of Computers and Computing," Seidman and Flores, Van Nos-
trad Reinhold, 1984; and "Integrated Circuits Applications Handbook," Arthur H.
Seidman, John Wiley & Sons, 1983.
Numeric equivalents of characters are shown as hexadecimal values.

2.0 Mechanical Interface
2.1 Connector arrangement
The CELL-DYN 1700 provides a standard D8-9 male connector, labeled COM 1,
mounted on the side of the instrument.
Pins on the D8-9 connector: (standard RS-232 9 pin assignments)
Pin 1: Data Carrier Detect (DCD input) (monitored)
Pin 2: Data to CELL-DYN 1700 (RD - receive data) (ACKINAK, XNO/XOFF)
Pin 3: Data to Host (LIS, results) (TD - transmit data)
Pin 4: Data Terminal Ready (DTR) (set true)
Pin 5: Signal Ground
Pin 6: Data Set Ready (DSR) (monitored)
Pin 7: Request to Send (RTS output) (set true)
Pin 8: Clear to Send (CTS input) (monitored, if requested in Setup)
Pin 9: Ring Indicate (RI input) (unused)

3.0 Electrical Interface
3.1 Voltage levels and electrical characteristics are as defined by the EIA RS-232C specifi~
cation.
3.2 The maximum recommended cable length is 30 meters, or 100 feet. The actual maxi-
mum workable cable length is dependent on the environment of the site, the selected
baud rate, and the equipment being connected together.
4.0 Data Interface

The system can be configured for data transmission using the Computer Setup menu. The coh-
figurable transmission parameters include data bits, stop bits, parity and baud rate.
4.1 The asynchronous method of data transmission (serial by bit) is used.
4.2 All information transmitted is in character form and is represented by 7-bit ASCII.
4.3 Transmitted characters consist of one (1) start bit, seven (7) or eight (8) data bits (Ieas~
significant first), one or no parity bit, and one (1) or two (2) stop bits.
4.4 Parity may be selected as none, odd, or even.
4.5 The transmission speed may be selected from 1200, 2400, 4800, or 9600 bits per sec-
ond (bps).

4.6 With the exception of the control characters mentioned in Section 5.2, only printable
ASCII characters (hex 20 to hex 7E) are used in a message.
5.0 Communication Protocol

5.1 Communication Modes
5.1.1 RUN Menu Automatic Transmit Mode

The User may select the Automatic Transmit mode on the Computer Setup Menu.
This mode allows the automatic transmission of results during the RUN cycle. If Auto-
matic Transmit mode has been selected, the user may also choose whether or not to
transmit histograms along with the count data.
5.1.2 OATALOG Menu Transmit Mode
On the DATALOG Menu, the user may select results from a single sample or from
multiple samples for transmission. Only count data may be transmitted from the Data
Log menu.
5.1.3 DISPLAY SPECIMEN Menu Transmit Mode
On the DISPLAY SPECIMEN Menu, the user may request transmission of results
from the specimen being displayed. Count data are transmitted. Histograms are also
transmitted if the Automatic Transmit mode is selected in the COMPUTER SETUP
Menu.

5.2 Transmission Control
Transmission control is provided in two ways: 1) XOFF/XON protocol in which the Host
transmits an XOFF character (hex 13) to stop transmission from the System and an
XON character (hex 11) to re-start transmission; and 2) CTS (Clear To Send) hardware
control.
The XOFF/XON protocol has a 1.5 second time-out. If no XON is received for 1.5 sec-
onds after an XOFF, then transmission resumes anyway.
The CTS hardware control has no time-out. That is, no data transmission will be started
with CTS false. However, the transmission will still time-out if at anyone time CTS
remains false for longer than the time-out selected in the COMPUTER SETUP Menu
(see Section 5.3.1 below). This is a different use and meaning for time-out, but it is
needed to prevent the Host from indefinitely delaying the CELL-DYN 1700 from pro-
cessing the next sample. Re-transmission requests are also supported and discussed
in Section 5.3.
5.3 Response from Host
5.3.1 Between-Transmission Time-out

The time-out interval after transmission of one message is programmable in the
COMPUTER SETUP Menu from 100 milliseconds to 9.9 seconds in 100 millisecond
increments. Note: The timer starts just as the ETX, which ends the message, is trans-
mitted.
5.3.2 Release for Next Message

The Host can release the CELL-DYN 1700 to send the next message by sending an
ACK (06 hex) before the time-out interval passes. Otherwise, the CELL-DYN 1700
will begin transmission of the next message at the end of the time-out interval in 5.3.-
above.
5.3.3 Re-transmission
If for any reason the Host requires re-transmission of the message, it signals the
CELL-DYN 1700 by sending a NAK (15 hex) before expiration of the time-out. A mes-
sage will be sent by the CELL-DYN 1700 a maximum of three (3) times. After that, the
same conditions prevail as after a time-out. The Host may (it is desirable but not man-
datory) acknowledge the retransmission with ACK or NAK. If ACK is sent, the CELL-
DYN 1700 will immediately start processing the next record (if any). If NAK is sent,
the record will NOT be transmitted a third time. Receipt of either the ACK or NAK will
allow the CELL-DYN 1700 to move to the next record more quickly.
5.4 Message Format
The message format consists of the following elements:

STX, ID SEGMENT, RESULT SEGMENT, CHECK SUM, ETX.
5.4.1 There are four (4) types of messages, each distinguished by its ID segment:
WBC Histogram Message
RBC Histogram Message
PLT Histogram Message
Count Data Message

5.4.2 The four messages taken together represent all the results of testing a single speci-
men.
5.4.3 Each message begins with STX (hex 02).
5.4.4 The Identification (10) segment is described fully in Section 6.
5.4.5 The Result segment is described fully in Section 7.
5.4.6 The Check Sum is always provided and may be optionally processed by the Host to
verify correct transmission. It is generated by taking the module-256 sum of all the
characters in the message except the STX and ETX characters. The two-digit hexa-
decimal representation of the Check Sum byte is placed immediately before the ETX
as two ASCII characters.
5.4.7 The ETX character (hex 03) is the last character of the message.
5.4.8 Message Length
Each of the three Histogram messages is 1204 characters long. The Count Data
message is 406 characters long. These message lengths count all characters from
STX to ETX inclusive.

5.4.9 Data Representation
Numeric data are transmitted in fields of fixed length with zeros used to fill empty
spaces on the left. Out-of-range numeric values are represented by strings of ">"
characters (hex 3E), and undefined numeric values are represented by strings of "-"
characters (hex 20). Alphanumeric data are transmitted in fields of fixed length
enclosed in double quotation marks (hex 22). Within the quotation marks, the data
are right-justified and blanks (hex 20) are used to fill empty spaces. Fields are sepa-
rated by commas (hex 2C).
6.0 Identification (10) Segment

6.0.1 For counting purposes, the STX mentioned in Section 5.4.3 is taken as byte 1.
6.1 The Identification segment of each message identifies the type of message and the
specimen the message represents.
6.2 Message Type - Field 1
The Message Type field identifies the message. There are four message types:
WBC Histogram Message - Type "WBC"
RBC Histogram Message- Type "RBC"
PLT Histogram Message - Type "PLT"
Count Data Message - Type"" (3 blanks)

6.3 Instrument Type - Field 2
The Instrument Type is an alphanumeric field of seven (7) characters enclosed in dou-
ble quotation marks. The string for the CELL-DYN 1700CS is sent as "CD1700C" and
for the CELL-DYN 1700 as " CD 1700".
6.4 Serial Number- Field 3
The Instrument Serial Number is an alphanumeric field of twelve (12) characters

enclosed in double quotation marks. It is not available in this release, so the field is
transmitted as "------------,, (twelve dashes).
6.5 Sequence Number - Field 4
The Sequence Number is a numeric field of four (4) characters with a value ranging from
o to 4999.
6.6 Specimen Type - Field 5
The Specimen Type is the fifth field in the Identification Segment. It occupies a numeric
field of two characters whose value identifies the specimen type as follows:
00: Patient type "PATIENT"
01: Replicate 1 "REPLIC 1"
Interface Specification CELL-DYM® 1700 System 04H03-01 A-February1995 10

10: Low Control "LOW CTRL"
11 : Normal Control "NOR CTRL"
12: High Control "HI CTRL"
13: Background " BACKGRD"
14: Electrical Background "ELECBKGD"
15: Calibrator "CALI BRATR"
16: Gain Adjustment "GAl N ADJ"
17: Auto Calibration "AUTO GAL"
6.7 Operator ID - Field 6
The Operator ID is a alphanumeric field of three (3) digits enclosed in double quotation
marks. If no Operator ID is specified, the field is transmitted as "---".

6.8 Specimen Date - Field 7
The Specimen Date, giving the date on which the specimen was run, is an alphanumeric
field of eight (8) characters enclosed in double quotation marks. The default format of
the date is MM/DDIYY, where MM represents the month in two digits, DD represents the
day of the month, and YY represents the year. The date format can be changed in the
DATE/TIME Menu.
6.9 Specimen Time - Field 8
The Specimen Time is a alphanumeric field of five (5) characters enclosed in double
quotation marks. It gives the time at which the specimen was run in standard 24-hour
format.
6.10 Specimen ID- Field 9
The Specimen ID is an alphanumeric field of nine (9) characters enclosed in double

quotation marks. If the specimen is a patient specimen, the Specimen ID is entered by
the operator. Otherwise, the Specimen ID is generated by the CELL-DYN 1700 to iden-
tify special types of samples, such as controls. If not specified, the Specimen ID is trans-
mitted as "---------" (9 dashes). See Section 6.6 (Field 5).

6. 11 Specimen Name- Field 10
The Specimen Name is the tenth field in the Identification Segment. It occupies a text
field of sixteen (16) characters enclosed in double quotation marks, and it is undefined
except for patient samples.
6. 12 Specimen Sex - Field 11
The Specimen Sex field consists of one (1) character "M" or "F" enclosed in double quo-
tation marks. If not entered by the operator, Specimen Sex is transmitted as a blank" ".
6.13 Specimen Date of Birth (DOB)- Field 12
The Specimen Date of Birth field has an identical format to Field 7, except that Field 7 is
automatically generated by the CELL-DYN 1700. If DOB is not entered by the operator,
it is transmitted as "bb/bb/bb" where the "bb"s are actually 2 ASCII blanks each.
6.14 Dr Name - Field 13
The Dr Name field is an alphanumeric field of twenty two (22) characters enclosed in
double quotation marks.

6.15 Collection Date - Field 14
The Collection Date field is an alphanumeric field of five (5) characters enclosed in dou-
ble quotation marks. The format is MM/DD, where MM represents the month in two dig-
its and DO represents the day. The year is not included. It gives the date at which the
specimen was collected. If the Collection Date is not entered, it is transmitted as "bb/bb"
where the "bb"s are 2 ASCII blanks as in Field 12 above.
6.16 Collection Time - Field 15
The Collection Time field is an alphanumeric field of five (5) characters enclosed in dou-
ble quotation marks. It gives the time at which the specimen was collected. If the Collec-
tion Time is not entered, it is transmitted as "bb:bb" ("bb"s are 2 ASCII blanks each and
":" is the middle byte).
6.17 Comment- Field 16
The Comment field is an alphanumeric field of sixteen (16) characters enclosed in dou-
ble quotation marks.

NOTE: Fields 1 to 16 above are common in both format AND actual content for a given
sample and, as such, are transmitted multiple times when histogram transmission is
requested (first (if sent) with all three histograms and then again with the count record).
Given today's typical transmission speeds and the lengths of the rest of the fields, the
convenience of having the header information combined with each data group has been
chosen over the absolute smallest or fastest transmission. Also, in the time frame of
even normal sample processing, the transmissions (at 9600 baud) should take less than
4 seconds out of the 60 second (nominal) cycle time.
7.0 Results Segment

7.1 The results for each specimen are sent in the format described. All numeric fields are
integers, and some need to be scaled by the Host.
7.2 Histogram Messages
Refer to Table 1, Histogram Messages, and Table 2, Histogram Record Dump.

7.2.1 Scale Factor- Field 17
The Scale Factor is a numeric field of five (5) characters. It is not implemented at this
time and is therefore always transmitted as 00000 (5 ASCII zeros without the sur-
rounding double quotes).
7.2.2 Channel Data - Fields 18 through 273

The Channel Data fields are numeric fields of three (3) characters each, giving nor-
malized counts for every channel of the designated histogram (WBC, RBC, or PLT).
Data for each channel will occupy 4 bytes total since there will be a comma between
each 3 digit value. Each value is rightjustified with ASCII zero "0" (not null) charac-
ters to keep the fields a fixed length. So a channel value of binary zero is transmitted
as three ASCII zero characters (000).
NOTE: A comma (,) follows the last field which immediately precedes the CRC char-
acters.
7.3 Count Data Message
Refer to Table 3, Count Data Messages, and Table 4, Count Record Dump.
The parameters reported by the instrument may be represented in any of four different
sets of measurement units as follows:
Set 1 - Standard USA
Set 2 - SI
Set 3 - Modified SI (HGB/MCHC in mmol/L, MCH in fmol)
Set 4 - Modified SI (HCT/PCT in %)
NOTE: The numeric values transmitted to the host are always sent in Standard USA
units even if the unit of measure, also being transmitted, is Set 2, 3, or 4.

To convert the integer transmitted in the field corresponding to a particular parameter to
the correct value for that parameter in the units being used, the decimal point must be
moved leftward from its implied position to the right of the integer. The description of
each field gives a shift count indicating how many places to move the decimal point in
each case. If, for example, the decimal point is to be moved two places to the left, a field
value of 00123 becomes 1.23. An integer representing the Units Set currently in effect is
transmitted in the the Units Set field (Section 7.3.46).
For Units Set 3, the HGB, MCH, and MCHC values must be multiplied by 0.6206 after
the decimal point has been positioned.
The units of measure associated with the four sets are explained in the CELL- DYN
1700 Operations Manual.
7.3.1 WBC Count- Field 17
The WBC Count is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
Units Set Shift Count Units Label
1 1 KluL
2-3 1 GIL
4 1 10E9/L
7.3.2 Spare Field - Field 18
The Spare Field is a numeric field of five (5) characters. It has a constant value of
zero (0) at this time, but is transmitted as five n_n (dashes) without surrounding double
quotes, since it is a numeric field.

7.3.3 LYM Count - Field 19
The LYM Count is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 1 KluL
2-3 1 GIL
4 1 10E9/L
7.3.4 MID Count - Field 20
The MID Count is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 1 KluL
2-3 1 GIL
4 1 10E9/L
7.3.5 GRAN Count- Field 21
The GRAN Count is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 1 KluL
2-3 1 GIL
4 1 10E9/L

zero (0) at this time, but is transmitted as five "_" (dashes) without surrounding double
7.3.7 RBC Count - Field 23
The RBC Count is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 2 M/uL
2-3 2 TIL
4 2 10E12/L
7.3.8 HGB Value - Field 24
The HGB Value is in a numeric field, five (5) characters long.
1 1 gldL
2 o gIL
3 1 (x 0.6206) mmol/L
4 o gIL

7.3.9 HCT Value - Field 25
The HCT Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 1 %
2-3 3 L/L
41%
7.3.10 MCV Value - Field 26
The MCV Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1-4 1 fL
7.3.11 MCH Value - Field 27
The MCH Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1-2 1 pg
3 2 (x 0.6206) fmol
4 1 pg

7.3.12 MCHC Value - Field 28
The MCHC Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 1 gldL
2 o gIL
3 1 (x 0.6206) mmollL
4 o gIL
7.3.13 RDW Value - Field 29
The RDW Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long
1-4 1 %
7.3.14 PLT Count - Field 30
The PLT Count is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 o KluL
2-3 o GIL
4 o 10E9/L

7.3.15 MPV Value - Field 31
The MPV Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1-4 1 fL
7.3.16 PCT Value - Field 32
The PCT Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1 2 %
2-3 1 mL/L
4 2 %
7.3.17 POW Value - Field 33
The POW Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1-4 1 10(GSO)
zero (0) at this time, but is transmitted as five n_n (dashes) without surrounding double

7.3.19 LYM % Value - Field 35
Field 35 The LYM % Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1-4 1 %
7.3.20 MID % Value - Field 36
The MID % Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1-4 1 %
7.3.21 GRAN % Value - Field 37
The GRAN % Value is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
1-4 1 %
zero (0) at this time, but is transmitted as five "-" (dashes) without the surrounding
double quotes, since it is a numeric field.

The Spare Field is in a numeric field. It has not been implemented at this time, so it is
always transmitted as a "-" single dash without the surrounding double quotes.
7.3.24 Spare Flag - Field 40
The Spare Flag is a numeric field of one (1) character. It has a constant value of zero
(0) at this time, but is transmitted as a single "-" (dash) without the surround double
quotes, since is presumed to be a spare numeric flag.
7.3.25 R4 WBC Flag - Field 41
The R4 WBC Flag is in a numeric field of one character. A value of 1 indicates that
the flag is set, and a value of 0 indicates that it is clear.
7.3.26 GR3 WBC Flag - Field 42
The GR3 WBC Flag is in a numeric field of one character. A value of 1 indicates that
the GRAN R3 flag is set, and a value of 0 indicates that it is clear.
7.3.27 MR3 WBC Flag - Field 43
The MR3 WBC Flag is in a numeric field of one character. A value of 1 indicates that
the Mono R3 WBC flag is set, and a value of 0 indicates that it is clear.
7.3.28 MR2 WBC Flag - Field 44
The MR2 WBC Flag is in a numeric field of one character. A value of 1 indicates that
the Mono R2 WBC flag is set, and a value of 0 indicates that it is clear.

7.3.29 LR2 WBe Flag - Field 45
The LR2 WBe Flag is in a numeric field of one character. A value of 1 indicates that
the Lym R2 WBe flag is set, and a value of 0 indicates that it is clear.
7.3.30 RI WBe Flag - Field 46
The R1 WBe Flag is in a numeric field of one character. A value of 1 indicates that
the RI WBe flag is set, and a value of 0 indicates that it is clear.
7.3.31 RO WBe Flag - Field 47
The RO WBe Flag is in a numeric field of one character. A value of 1 indicates that
the flag is set, and a value of 0 indicates that it is clear.
7.3.32 Spare Flags - Fields 48 through 60
There are thirteen Spare Flag fields which are each a numeric field of one (1) charac-
ter. It has a constant value of zero (0) at this time. These are transmitted as follows
(no surrounding quotes):
-"--"---- - -'-"- -
" "-"
7.3.33 LRI Flag - Field 61
The LRI Flag is in a numeric field of two characters. A value of 16 indicates that the
flag is set, and a value of 00 indicates that it is clear.
7.3.34 URI Flag - Field 62
The URI Flag is in a numeric field of two characters. A value of 32 indicates that the
flag is set, and a value of 00 indicates that it is clear.

7.3.35 WBC Lower Meniscus Time - Field 63
The WBC Lower Meniscus Time is in a numeric field five (5) characters long. It gives
the time in units of milliseconds.
7.3.36 WBC Upper Meniscus Time - Field 64
The WBC Upper Meniscus Time is in a numeric field five (5) characters long. It gives
7.3.37 RBC Lower Meniscus Time - Field 65
The RBC Lower Meniscus Time is in a numeric field five (5) characters long. It gives
7.3.38 RBC Upper Meniscus Time - Field 66
The RBC Upper Meniscus Time is in a numeric field five (5) characters long. It gives
7.3.39 Recount RBC Lower Meniscus Time - Field 67
The Recount RBC Lower Meniscus Time is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
It gives the time in units of milliseconds. It has a value of 0 if there was no recount.
7.3.40 Recount RBC Upper Meniscus Time - Field 68
The Recount RBC Upper Meniscus Time is in a numeric field five (5) characters long.
It gives the time in units of milliseconds. It has a value of 0 if there was no recount.

7.3.41 Limits Set - Field 69
The Limits Set is a numeric field of one character. It indicates which set of patient lim-
its (1 to 4) was in effect for the given patient specimen.
7.3.42 Sample Mode - Field 70
The Sample Mode is an alphanumeric field of one character. An "0" (letter 0) indi-
cates that the specimen was taken in Open Sample mode; a "C" indicates Closed
Sample mode, and a "P" indicates Pre-Dilute mode.
7.3.43 RBC Metering Fault Flag - Field 71
The RBC Metering Fault flag is a numeric field of one character. A "0" (zero) indicates
that there was no metering fault. A "1 " (one) indicates a flow error, and a "2" (two)
indicates a clog.
7.3.44 WBC Metering Fault Flag - Field 72
The WBC Metering Fault flag is a numeric field of one character. A "0" (zero) indi-
cates that there was no metering fault. A "1" (one) indicates a flow error, and a "2"
(two) indicates a clog.
7.3.45 Sampling Error or Other Sample Processing Fault - Field 73
This is a numeric field of one character. A "0" (zero) indicates there was no error. A
"1" (one) indicates there was an error.

7.3.46 Units Set Field - Field 74
This is a numeric field of one character. The value is 1, 2, 3, or 4 as described in Sec-
tion 7.3.
There are four sets of measurement units. A problem arises under the following con-
ditions:
1. Some data is collected and stored under one unit of measure.
2. Subsequently, data is collected and.stored under another unit of measure.
3. All the data is transmitted to a Laboratory Information System.
The numeric results data, starting in field 17, are always- sent as Standard USA units
even though that data may be displayed in a different unit of measure on the instru-
ment. The displayed unit of measure, sent in field 74, is transmitted for informational
purposes only and mayor may not correspond to the Standard USA format of the
transmitted numeric results data.
NOTE: A comma (,) follows the last field which immediately precedes the CRC char-
acters.

TABLE 1: HISTOGRAM MESSAGES
Start at Byte Paragraph
Field# Description
Byte Length #
N/A STX (Ox02) 1 1 5.4.3
1 Message Type 2 3* 6.2
2 Instrument Type 8 7* 6.3
3 Serial Number 18 12 * 6.4
4 Sequence Number 33 4 6.5
5 Specimen Type 38 2 6.6
6 Operator ID 41 3* 6.7
7 Specimen Date 47 8* 6.8
8 Specimen Time 58 5* 6.9
9 Specimen ID 66 9* 6.10
10 Specimen Name 78 16 * 6.11
11 Specimen Sex 97 1* 6.12
12 Specimen DOE 101 8* 6.13
13 Dr Name 112 22 * 6.14
14 Collect Date 137 5* 6.15
15 Collect Time 145 5* 6.16
16 Comment 153 16 * 6.17
The above fields are common to both this
Table and Table 3
17 Scale Factor (n/a) 172 5 7.2.1

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
TABLE 1: HISTOGRAM MESSAGES

Field# Description
Byte Length #
18 Channel 1 Data 178 3 7.2.2
II II II II II II
...
273 Channel 256 Data 1198 3 7.2.2
N/A CRC (2 hex ASCII printable) 1202 2 5.4.6
N/A ETX (Ox03) 1204 1 5.4.7
* indicates characters enclosed in double quotation marks.

Note: If a field contains 3 characters plus double quotation marks and a comma, the
total number of bytes used is 6. See the Histogram Message Example.

TABLE 2: HISTOGRAM RECORD DUMP
02 22 57 42 43 22 2C 22-20 43 44 31 37 30 30 22 "WBC" ," CO 1700"
2C 22 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 20 20 20 20 20 22 2C ..------------..,
,
34 32 38 38 2C 30 30 2C-22 20 20 20 22 2C 22 31 4288 "00 "- - -" ,"1
30 2F 31 39 2F 39 34 22-2C 22 31 36 3A 34 34 22 0/19/91","16:44"
2C 22 20 20 20 2D 20 20-20 20 20 22 2C 22 20 20 ,. ---------. ,..
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 20 20 20 20 31 22 2C 1",
22 40 22 2C 22 20 20 2F-20 20 2F 20 20 22 2C 22 "M" , " I I " , "
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20 2 22 2C-22 20 20 2F 20 20 22 2C " , "I" ,

22 20 20 3a 20 22 22 C-22 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 " . ","
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 22 2C 30 30 30 30 30 " ,00000
2C 30 30 30 2C 30 30 30-2C 30 30 30 2C 30 30 30 ,000,000,000,000
2C 30 30 30 2C 30 30 30-2C 30 30 30 2C 30 30 30 ,000,000,000,000
2C 30 30 30 2C 30 34 32-2C 30 34 38 2C 30 35 34 ,000,042,048,054
2C 30 35 37 2C 30 35 39-2C 30 35 35 2C 30 34 35 ,057,059,055,045
2C 30 33 35 2C 30 32 35-2C 30 32 30 2C 30 31 36 ,035,025,020,016
... (channels have been deleted)
2C 30 35 32 2C 30 35 33-2C 30 35 31 2C 30 35 30 ,052,053,051,050

30 ,049,048,047,000
30 ,000,000,000,000
,65.
Note: Each line contains 16 characters starting with i, not zero. The "02" and "." balded on the first line
refer to the STX character. The "03" and "65" balded on the last line refer to the ETX and CRC char-
acters respectively.
TABLE 3: COUNT DATA MESSAGE

Field# Description
Byte Length #
N/A STX (Ox02) 1 1 5.4.3
1 Message Type 2 3* 6.2
2 Instrument Type 8 7* 6.3
3 Serial Number 18 12 * 6.4
4 Sequence Number 33 4 6.5
5 Specimen Type 38 2 6.6
6 Operator 10 41 3* 6.7
7 Specimen Date 47 8* 6.8
8 Specimen Time 58 5* 6.9
9 Specimen 10 66 9* 6.10
10 Specimen Name 78 16 * 6.11

TABLE 3: COUNT DATA MESSAGE
Field# Description
Byte Length #
11 Specimen Sex 97 1* 6.12
12 Specimen DOE 101 8* 6.13
13 Dr Name 112 22 * 6.14
14 Collect Date 137 5* 6.15
15 Collect Time 145 5* 6.16
16 Comment 153 16 * 6.17
The above fields are common to both this
Table and Table 1
17 WBC Count 172 5 7.3.1
18 Spare Field 178 5 7.3.2
19 LYM Count 184 5 7.3.3
20 MID Count 190 5 7.3.4
21 GRAN Count 196 5 7.3.5
22 Spare Field 202 5 7.3.6
23 RBC Count 208 5 7.3.7
24 HGB Value 214 5 7.3.8
25 HCTValue 220 5 7.3.9
26 MCVValue 226 5 7.3.10
27 MCH Value 232 5 7.3.11
28 MCHC Value 238 5 7.3.12
29 ROW Value 244 5 7.3.13
Field# Description
Byte Length #
30 PLT Count 250 5 7.3.14
31 MPVValue 256 5 7.3.15
32 PCTValue 262 5 7.3.16
33 PDWValue 268 5 7.3.17
34 Spare Field 274 5 7.3.18
35 LYM % Value 280 5 7.3.19
36 MID % Value 286 5 7.3.20
37 GRAN % Value 292 5 7.3.21
38 Spare Field 298 5 7.3.22
39 Spare Field 304 1 7.3.23
40 Spare Field 306 1 7.3.24
41 R4 WBC Flag 308 1 7.3.25
42 GR3WBC Flag 310 1 7.3.26
43 MR3WBC Flag 312 1 7.3.27
44 MR2WBC Flag 314 1 7.3.28
45 LR2 WBC Flag 316 1 7.3.29
46 R1 WBC Flag 318 1 7.3.30
47 ROWBC Flag 320 1 7.3.31
48- 60 Spare Flags 322 1 7.3.32
61 LRI Flag 348 2 7.3.33
62 URI Flag 351 2 7.3.34
Field# Description
Byte Length #
63 WBC Lower Meniscus Time 354 5 7.3.35
64 WBC Upper Meniscus Time 360 5 7.3.36
65 RBC Lower Meniscus Time 366 5 7.3.37
66 RBC Upper Meniscus Time 372 5 7.3.38
Recount RBC Lower
67 378 5 7.3.39
Meniscus Time
Recount RBC Upper
68 384 5 7.3.40
Meniscus Time
69 Limits Set 390 1 7.3.41
70 Sample Mode 392 1* 7.3.42
71 RBC Meteri Fault Flag 396 1 7.3.43
72 WBC Meteri Fault Flag 398 1 7.3.44
Sampling Error/incomplete
73 400 1 7.3.45
Aspiration Flag
74 Units Set Field 402 1 7.3.46
n/a CRC (2 hex ASCII printable) 404 2 5.4.6
n/a ETX (Ox03) 406 1 5.4.7
* indicates characters enclosed in double quotation marks
Note: If a field contains 3 characters plus double quotation marks and a comma, the
total number of bytes used is 6. See the Count Data Message Example.

Table 1: Histogram Record Dump
02 22 20 20 20 22 2C 22-20 43 44 31 37 30 30 22 ." " , " C01700"
2C 22 20 20 20 20 2C 20-20 20 20 20 20 20 22 2C ,II
---- --- -- --- , II
34 32 38 38 2C 30 30 2C~2 20 20 20 22 2C 22 31 4288 ,00 ,"---" ,"1

30 2F 31 39 2F 39 34 22~C 22 31 36 3A 34 34 22 0/19/94","16:44"
2C 22 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 20 20 22 2C 22 20 20 , --------- ,
II II II
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 20 20 20 20 31 22 2C 1",
22 40 22 2C 22 20 20 2F-20 20 2F 20 20 22 2C 22 "M" ," / / " , "
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
20 20 20 20 20 20 22 2C-22 20 20 2F 20 20 22 2C " , "/" ,
22 20 20 3A 20 20 22 2C-22 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 " . ""
,
20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20-20 22 2C 30 30 35 32 35 ",00525
2C 20 20 20 20 20 2C 30-30 30 31 30 2C 30 30 30 "----- 0001 0 ,000
31 36 2C 30 30 34 39 39-2C 20 20 20 20 20 2C 30 16,00499,-----,0
30 32 35 31 2C 30 30 30-37 34 2C 30 30 32 32 36 0251,00074,00226
2C 30 30 39 30 30 2C 30-30 32 39 35 2C 30 30 33 ,00900,00295,003
32 37 2C 30 30 31 38 37-2C 30 30 33 39 35 2C 30 27,00187,00395,0
30 30 36 38 2C 30 30 30-32 37 2C 30 30 31 38 38 0068,00027,00188
2C 20 20 20 20 20 2C 30-30 30 31 39 2C 30 30 30 ,-----,00019,000
33 31 2C 30 30 39 35 30-2C 20 20 20 20 20 2C 20 31,00950,-----,-
2C 20 2C 30 2C 30 2C 30-2C 31 2C 31 2C 30 2C 30 ,-,0,0,0,1,1,0,0

Table 1: Histogram Record Dump (Continued)
2C 20 2C 20 2C 20 2C 20-2C 20 2C 20 2C 20 2C 20
""""
2C 20 2C 20 2C 20 2C 20-2C 20 2C 30 30 2C 30 30 ,-,-,-,-,-,00,00
2C 30 34 38 33 37 2C 30-32 31 32 31 2C 30 36 34 ,04837,02121,064
31 31 2C 30 35 30 37 30-2C 30 30 30 30 30 2C 30 11,05070,00000,0
30 30 30 30 2C 34 2C 22-4F 22 2C 30 2C 30 2C 30 0000,4, "0" ,0,0,0
2C 31 2C 33 37 03 ,1,37.
HISTOGRAM MESSAGE EXAMPLE
Actual transmission [remarks for text here]

(no CRlLF)
[STX] [start of text]
"WBC", [message type] Field 1
"C01700C", [instrument type]
" " [serial #]
1040, [sequence no.]
00, [specimen type] Field 5
"123", [operator 10]
"08/31/94", [specimen date]

HISTOGRAM MESSAGE EXAMPLE (Continued)
"12:34", [specimen time]
"123456789", [specimen 10]
" JOHN DOE", [specimen name] Field 10
"M", [specimen sex]
"10/1 5/46", [specimen DOB
" DR JANE DOE", [doctor name]
"08/30", [collect date]
'09:50", [collect time] Field 15
" sampie 1", [comment] Field 16
00000, [scale factor n/a] Field 17
000, [channel 1 data] Field 18
000, [channel 2 data]





027, [channel 6 9 data]




066, [chan nel 126 data]








034, [chan nel 247 data]
000, [channel 256 data] Field 273
[note comma after
channel 256 but not
after the checksum]
E7 [checksum]
NOTE: Sample checksum value may
not match this record's data.
[ETX [end of text]

[start of text] Field 1
"WBC", [message type]
"CD1700C" , [instrument type]
"------------ " [serial #]
1040, [sequence no.]
00, [specimen type] Field 5
"123", [operator 10]
"08/31/94", [specimen date]
"12:34", [specimen time]
"123456789" , [specimen 10]
" JOHN DOE" , [specimen name] Field 10
"M" , [specimen sex]
"10/1 5/46" , [specimen DOB
" DR JANE DOE", [doctor name]
"08/30", [collect date]
'09:50", [collect time] Field 15

COUNT DATA MESSAGE EXAMPLE (Continued)
" sample 1", [comment] Field 16
00083, [WBC count] Field 17
[spare field]
00015, [LYM count]
00006, [MID count] Field 20
00062, [GRAN count]
[spare field]
00476, [RBC count] Field 23
00166, [HGB value] Field 24
00447, [HCT value]
00940, [MCV value]
00349, [MCH value]
00371, [MCHC value]
00118, [ROW value]
00230, [PLT value] Field 30
00084, [MPV value]

COUNT DATA MESSAGE EXAMPLE (Continued)
08107, [RBC lower meniscus time]
07656, [RBC upper meniscus time]
00000, [recount lower time]
21845, [recount upper time]
1, [limits set]
"C", [sample mode] Field 70
0, [RBC metering fault]
0, [WBC metering fault]
0, [sample error/incomplete
aspiration] Field 73
1 [units set field] Field 74
9B [checksum]
NOTE: Sample checksum value
may not match this record's data.
[ETX] [end of text]

AB-CD1700 Service Manual (1995-02 Rev 9140265A) Pp446-OCR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AB-CD1700 Service Manual (1995-02 Rev 9140265A) Pp446-OCR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

• Section Table of Contents

Abbott Laboratories ©1995, Abbott Diagnostics

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1995 1

CELL-DYN® is a registered trademark of Sequoia-Turner Corporation, a wholly owned subsidiary of

QAPlus© is a registered trademark of DiagSoft, Inc.

TYGON® is a registered trademark of Norton Performance Plastics.

VACUTAINER® is a registered trademark of Becton, Dickinson, and Company.

© 1995 by Abbott Laboratories. All rights reserved.

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1995 2

Revision number: Pages revised and/or added:

Originally issued February, 1995 Not applicable.

Table 1: Revision Record

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1995 3

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February 1995 4

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-1

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-2

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-3

1.2 PURPOSE AND SCOPE

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-4

1.3 SERVICE EXPERIENCE

1.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-5

Service Manual rganization

CELL-DYN® 170 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-6

Accident Preven ion Labels

CELL-DYN® 170 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-7

Denotes possible death or serious injury; failure to comply will

Denotes clear and present danger or questionable result efficacy;

Denotes minor, non-immediate, or potential hazard; failure to

CELL-DYN® 170 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-8

WARNING: Potential Biohazard. The biohazard icon

WARNING: Electrical Shock Hazard. The electrical

Static. Failure to comply may cause damage to the

CAUTION. The general caution icon appears adjacent

CELL-DYN® 170 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-9

CELL-DYN® 170 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-10

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-11

1.6 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS

Setting Range Frequency

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-13

Avg. 410 Watts (1460 BTU per hour)

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-14

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-15

Aspiration Volumes - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-16

Measurement Specifications - CELL-DYN 1700 and 1700CS

Method Aperture Impedance

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-17

Method Modified cyanmethemoglobin

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-18

WBC <0.5 K/JlL

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-19

Parameter Linear Reportable Allowable

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-20

WBC RBC HGB PLT

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-22

Cell Type Range 950/0 Confidence

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-23

Parameter Range Correlation Coefficient

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-24

Typical Within Sample

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-25

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 1-26

CELL-DYN® 1700 Service Manual 9140265A-February1995 2-1